Skip to main content

Full text of "My Eskimo Friends"

See other formats


•V'-'v' 


.A.V 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 
in  2017  with  funding  from 
Media  History  Digital  Library 


https://archive.org/details/myeskimofriendsOOunse 


MY  ESKIMO  FRIENDS 

“nanook  of  the  north” 


\ 


NANOOK  THE  BEAR 


© liei  lUon  Frcre.'i 


MY 

ESKIMO  FRIENDS 


“NANOOK  OF  THE  NORTH” 

BY 

ROBERT  J.  FLAHERTY,  F.  R.  G.  S. 


IN  COLLABORATION  WITH 


FRANCES  HUBBARD  FLAHERTY 


ILLUSTRATED  WITH 
PHOTOGRAVURES  AND  COLOR  PLATES 
FROM  PHOTOGRAPHS  BY  THE  AUTHOR 

HALFTONE  DRAWINGS  BY 
ESKIMO  ARTISTS  AND  MAPS 


GARDEN  CITY  NEW  YORK 


DOUBLEDAY,  PAGE  & COMPANY 

1924 


^OLVAY  PUBLIC  LiBhak 


COPYRIGHT,  1922,  1923,  1924,  BY 
DOUBLEDAY,  PAGE  & COMPANY 


ALL  RIGHTS  RESERVED 


PRINTED  IN  THE  UNITED  STATES 
AT 

THE  COUNTRY  LIFE  PRESS,  GARDEN  CITY,  N.  Y. 


First  Edition 


MY  FATHER 


The  Discovery 
Islands  . 

CONTENTS 

PART  I 

PACE 

AND  Exploration  of  the  Belcher 
i 

PART  II 

Winter  on  Wetalltok’s  Island 49 

PART  III 

The  Exploration  of  Northern  Ungava  ...  77 


Films  . 

PART  IV 

117 

COLOUR  ILLUSTRATIONS 
Nanook  the  Bear Frontispiece 

FACING  PAGE 

Nyla 98 

Nanook  the  Harpooner 146 

HALFTONES 

Off  from  the  Wintering  Base  on  a Sledge  Trip  . . 26 

Eskimo  Hunting  Walrus 42 

Goose  Hunting 66 

Eskimo  Hunting  Scenes 90 

Hunting  Nanook  (the  bear) 130 

The  Artist  and  His  Signature — Wetalltok ....  154 


LIST  OF  PHOTOGRAVURE  PLATES 

FACING  PAGE 

The  Hunter i8 

Eskimo  Omiak  in  the  Spring 34 

Tooktoo  (The  Deer) 58 

Allegoo  (Shining  Water)  74 

Nascaupie  Indian  Chief 82 

Nyla  and  Child 106 

The  Walrus  Hunter 114 

The  Youthful  Hunter 122 

The  Barren  Lands 138 


MAPS 


A Detail  Map  of  Two  Routes  followed  by  Mr.  Flaherty 
Hudson  Bay  and  the  Fictionary  Belcher  Islands  . 
Hudson  Bay  and  the  Real  Belcher  Islands 

Route  of  the  Schooner  Laddie 

Map  of  the  Belcher  Islands 

A Seventeenth  Century  Map  of  Hudson  Bay. 


PART  I 


THE  DISCOVERY  AND  EXPLORATION 
OF  THE  BELCHER  ISLANDS 


■-i' 


■I 


€ 


t- 


\* 


\ 

I'' 

U. 


MY  ESKIMO  FRIENDS 


I 


HE  Government  of  Canada,  in  1910,  decided  to  con- 


struct a railway  from  the  wheatfields  of  the  west  to 


the  west  coast  of  Hudson  Bay  in  order  to  provide  an 


outlet  for  the  shipment  of  wheat  through  Hudson  Bay  and 
Hudson  Strait  to  Europe.  Sir  William  Mackenzie,  whose 
railway,  the  Canadian  Northern,  was  then  in  the  initial  stages 
of  its  construction  across  the  continent,  decided  to  investi- 
gate the  seaboard  of  Hudson  Bay  for  iron  ore.  He  reasoned 
that  if  the  shipment  of  wheat  could  be  successfully  carried 
out,  iron  ore  as  well  could  be  shipped  to  the  great  markets 
of  the  world. 

Sir  William,  in  August,  1910,  commissioned  the  writer  to 
undertake  an  exploration  of  the  Nastapoka  Islands,  outlying 
the  east  coast  of  Hudson  Bay.  Upon  certain  islands  of  the 
group,  iron  ore  was  reported  to  occur. 

Through  the  great  hinterland  of  Quebec  and  Ontario  my 
father^  had  carried  on,  from  the  time  that  I was  a boy,  ex- 
tensive explorations  for  iron  ore.  With  his  engineers  and 
prospectors  I grew  up  on  explorations  whose  range,  east  and 
west,  was  more  than  a thousand  miles.  Long  journeys  some 
of  them  seemed  to  be  then — through  the  courses  of  un- 

*Robert  H.  Flaherty,  who  during  his  lifetime  was  the  foremost  figure  in  the  iron  ore 
exploration  of  Canada. 


o 


MY  ESKIMO  FRIENDS 


mapped  lakes  and  streams,  over  the  height  of  land  and  on 
halfway  down  the  big  tumbling  rivers  whose  ends  are  on 
Hudson  Bay.  Hudson  Bay  was  mysterious  country.  The 
grizzled  old  fur  traders  and  the  fur  brigades  of  strange  In- 
dians, curiously  garbed,  with  hair  shoulder-long,  whom  we 
sometimes  ran  into,  seemed  to  be  people  of  another  world. 

Crew  and  outfit  were  modest  enough.  Crundell,  a young 
Englishman,  for  the  first  stage  of  the  journey  was  my  sole 
companion.  A seventeen-foot  “Chestnut,”  beans,  bacon, 
bannock,  dried  fruit,  and  tea,  the  usual  grub  supply  of  north- 
country  men,  a few  simple  Instruments,  and  a carbine  Win- 
chester, comprised  the  outfit. 

We  jumped  off  for  the  North  from  a tiny  settlement  out- 
lying the  northern  Ontario  frontier.  Ground  Hog  by  name, 
whose  only  reason  for  being  was  that  it  was  a temporary 
rail  end  pending  the  bridging  by  the  Grand  Trunk  Pacific 
of  the  Ground  Hog  River,  upon  the  stump-scarred  banks  of 
which  it  stood. 

Down  the  silent,  sombrely  forested  courses  of  the  little 
Ground  Hog,into  the  big  Mattagaml,and  on  into  the  smooth, 
swift,  mile-wide  mirror  of  the  Moose  was  only  five  days’ 
travel,  for  though  the  distance  was  nearly  two  hundred 
miles,  the  rivers  were  high  and  flowing  strong. 

The  rugged  granites  over  which  the  Mattagami  breaks, 
long  “saults,”  smoking  falls,  and  canyon-slots  through  the 
hills,  give  way  about  halfway  down  to  a vast  muskeg  plain 
which  extends  for  the  remainder  of  the  river  courses  to  the 
sea — a great  desolate  waste,  treeless  save  along  the  margins 
of  lakes  and  streams.  Unbrokenly  level,  in  Devonian  times, 
as  the  fossils  in  the  limestone  of  its  underlying  formation 


THE  BELCHER  ISLANDS 


show,  it  was  the  floor  of  the  now  distant  sea.  Through  it 
the  Mattagami,  a deep  groove,  loops  and  winds. 

Wide  scars  of  brulee,  chafing  tangles  of  tree  trunks  barked 
and  bleached  by  the  weather,  alternated  with  live  forests  of 
sombre  fir,  silver  birches,  and  long-stemmed,  sea-green 
groves  of  poplar.  Huge  portions  of  it,  undermined  by  the 
icefields  of  break-up  time  in  spring  and  by  the  floods  of  high- 
water  season,  lay  avalanched  in  chaos  on  the  lower  slopes. 
Trunks,  branches,  and  foliage  of  the  wreckage  swayed  like 
dead  heads  at  midstream. 

There  was  little  wild  life.  The  raucous  cries  of  wheeling 
gulls,  the  “quawk,  quawk”  of  wood  duck,  were  infrequent 
enough  to  be  startling.  Even  in  the  forest  places,  the  cawing 
of  some  “Whisky  Johnny”  for  bitsof  bannock  and  bacon 
rind,  and  the  forlorn  cries  of  “Poor  Canada”  were  the  only 
sounds.  Of  natives  we  saw  only  signs — gaunt  tepee  frames, 
sleeping  patches  of  weather-rusted  boughs,  and  here  and 
there  poles  that,  as  they  inclined  upstream  or  down,  pointed 
out  the  travellers’  direction;  or  message  sticks  bearing  scrolls 
of  birch  bark  covered  with  charcoal  writing  in  the  mission- 
ary’s syllabic  Cree. 

The  Moose  begins,  impressively  large,  where  the  Mis- 
sanabe  from  the  west  and  the  Mattagami  meet.  By  night- 
fall it  broadened  to  three  miles.  The  forests  of  either  shore 
gave  way  to  dreary  wastes  of  muskeg  and  to  spectres  of 
solitary  wind-shapen  trees.  Seaward  were  long  leaden  lanes 
and  smoky  haze  and  the  mirage  of  islands  in  the  sky. 

On  the  river’s  last  large  island,  we  reached  the  great  fur 
stronghold  of  the  North,  two  and  a half  centuries  old.  Moose 
Factory — an  enchanting  panorama  enchantingly  unwinding 


4 


MY  ESKIMO  FRIENDS 


—tepees,  overturned  canoes,  green  cultivated  fields,  mea- 
dows, hayricks,  grazing  cattle,  prim  cottages  and  rough- 
hewn  cabins,  a little  old  church  with  a leaning  red  tow&r, 
and  in  formal  array,  red-roofed,  weather-worn  post  buildings. 

A few  curious  half-breeds  and  their  wives  stood  at  the 
edge  of  the  bank  as  we  climbed  from  the  landing.  The  men 
slouched,  hands  in  pockets,  gazed  intently,  and  the  women, 
in  the  abashed  manner  of  the  country,  peered  from  the  hooded 
depths  of  their  plaid  shawls.  In  the  background  a group  of 
Indian  women  and  their  children  lingered  furtively.  Dogs 
innumerable,  enervated  by  the  warmth  of  sun,  lay  sprawled 
on  the  green — short-haired  Indian  curs,  and  here  and  there  a 
splendid  husky  from  the  barrens  of  the  Eskimos  far  north- 
ward. On  the  green  stood  an  elaborately  staged  flagpole 
flanked  by  two  old  bronze  field  guns;  adjacent,  the  trade 
shop,  over  its  entrance  the  Company’s  emblazoned  coat  of 
arms;  and  deep-set  from  the  green  an  old  three-storied  fur 
warehouse,  alongside  of  it  the  forge  of  the  armourer  and  the 
boatyards  of  the  shipwrights  and  carpenters;  and  facing 
them  all  the  master’s  white  red-roofed  mansion  with  dormer 
windows  and  a deep  encircling  veranda. 

With  the  post  officers — they  wore  informal  tweeds  and 
white  collars — we  dined  in  the  messroom  of  the  mansion, 
where  a moccasined  Indian  served  us  from  a sideboard  array 
of  old  silver  plate.  Travel  on  the  river,  the  high  or  low  water, 
and  such  countryside  topics  as  the  approaching  goose- 
hunting time  “Hannah  Bay  way,”  Tom  Pant’s  silver  foxes. 
Long  Mary’s  good-for-nothing  husband,  and,  of  course, 
what  the  free-traders  were  doing,  were  the  topics  of  conver- 
sation. We  were  somewhat  nonplussed  that  none  showed 


THE  BELCHER  ISLANDS 


5 


more  than  a perfunctory  interest  in  news  from  the  frontier 
or  concern  for  the  mail  we  had  brought — toward  the  latter 
not  half  the  avidity  one  of  us  would  display  toward  a morn- 
ing paper.  It  must  be  remembered,  however,  that  most  of 
these  men  are  recruited  in  their  teens  from  the  Old  Country. 
Growing  up  in  the  service  from  clerk  apprenticeships,  they 
become  inured  to  the  monotony  of  post  life,  its  staid  con- 
ventions and  narrow,  unchanging  rounds  of  duty.  One 
interest  predominates — the  Indian  hunter  and  his  fur. 

Our  host  informed  us  that  the  chief  factor  was  at  Charlton 
Island,  some  seventy  miles  out  in  the  Bay.  With  him  we 
would  have  to  make  arrangements  for  further  stages  of 
travel  up  the  Bay  from  Charlton.  We  were  provided  with 
an  open  “York”  boat  and  a crew,  one  Captain  John  Puggie, 
a half-breed  post  servant,  and  three  upland  Indians,  one  of 
whom  (but  not  distinguishable  save  that  he  was  sulkier)  was 
Chief  of  the  Moose  River  Crees.  The  Indians  with  their 
moccasins  and  hooded  trade  capotes,  belted  thrice  around 
with  varicoloured  sashes,  looked  anything  but  seamen. 

We  weighed  anchor  under  lowering  sky  and  rising  wind, 
but  as  we  sailed  the  estuary’s  channels,  twelve  winding  miles 
to  sea,  we  had  eyes  for  nothing  but  the  wildfowl  around  us. 
Before  our  thrashing  sails,  outspread  like  flails,  in  panic  and 
alarm  they  rose  in  multitudes — wheeling  gulls,  skimming 
yellowlegs,  darting  plover;  squawking  wood  duck,  teal,  and 
mallard,  that,  flying  low,  would  circle  us;  and  from  willow- 
hidden  ponds,  with  a clash  and  clamour  and  clumsy  tattoo, 
geese,  wildly  honking  as  they  climbed  awkwardly  toward  the 
sky. 

Not  until  we  rounded  the  outer  bar  did  we  see  the  ugly 


6 


MY  ESKIMO  FRIENDS 


leer  in  the  sky  behind  us.  In  a moment  more  we  were  stand- 
ing out  among  the  turbid  reaches  of  the  open  bay;  the  faint 
gray  stippling  of  upland  trees,  the  sweeps  of  the  delta  plain, 
and  the  tawny  rims  of  shoreline  were  lost  to  view,  and  walls 
of  rain,  flayed  by  a gale  piping  through  the  cordage  of 
creaking  spars  and  wailing  above  the  slosh  and  hiss  and  din 
of  the  seas  around,  lashed  us,  Indians  and  white  men,  who 
grouped  for  shelter  in  the  open  hold.  We  peered  with  dismay 
from  the  lost  shelter  of  the  outer  bar  to  the  tumbling  steamy 
wastes  ahead,  but  old  Puggie,  donning  oilers  and  sou’wester, 
grimly  smiled  the  fact  that  we  were  caught,  and  settled  down 
to  the  helm  for  a day  of  it.  With  only  a sweep  to  hold  her — 
the  rudder,  torn  from  its  pintles,  was  swept  away — Puggie 
landed  us  on  the  Island  before  nightfall. 


II 


CHARLTON  ISLAND  is  the  deep-sea  anchorage  of 
the  Hudson’s  Bay  Company’s  fur  ship  which  an- 
nually comes  out  from  England.  Here,  in  summer, 
is  the  rendezvous  for  fur  men  from  hundreds  of  miles  around, 
who  come  with  their  half-breed  servants  and  Indian  crews  in 
small  “York”  boats  for  their  year’s  mail  and  goods  for  their 
post  trade.  The  place  was  thronged  when  we  arrived,  for 
the  fur  ship  lately  come  had  cleared  again  for  England.  A 
young  Scotchman,  just  apprenticed  to  the  trade,  played  his 
bagpipe  to  the  delight  and  wonder  of  the  visiting  Indians, 
half-breed  longshoremen,  and  a group  of  Eskimo  migrants  of 
years  before  from  the  far-off  barrens  of  the  Great  Whale 
Coast,  three  dumpy  little  men,  their  solemn-faced  wives,  and 
bashful  troop  of  miniature  Jap  children.  There  was  also  a 
grizzled  white-haired  old  factor  just  returned  from  his  first 
furlough  in  thirty  years;  the  company’s  Arctic  pilot  who  had 
lately  navigated  a Danish  brig  through  the  icefields  of 
Hudson  Strait;  and  the  master,  mate,  and  crew  of  the 
above-mentioned  brig,  which,  badly  wracked  by  ice,  now  lay 
abandoned  half-heeled  on  the  beach  hard  by.  Her  master, 
pulling  on  his  long  pipe  of  porcelain,  habitually  paced  the 
wharf  in  clattering  sabots,  deeply  distressed  over  his  good 
ship’s  inglorious  end. 

When  I explained  to  the  chief  factor  my  plan  of  travelling 
northward,  to  my  dismay  he  said  that  such  a journey  at  this 


7 


8 


MY  ESKIMO  FRIENDS 


late  season  would  be  impossible.  Snow  squalls  were  already 
flying,  while  in  the  country  of  my  destination  winter  was 
even  now  at  hand.  We  could  only  wait  at  Charlton  until  a 
schooner  came  along,  then  proceed  northward  along  the 
coast  to  Fort  George,  winter  there,  and  upon  formation  of 
the  first  sea  ice,  continue  north  by  sledge  with  Eskimos. 

The  journey  to  Fort  George,  though  less  than  two  hundred 
miles,  took  ten  days  to  make,  for  head  winds  held  us  weather- 
bound at  various  of  the  islands — small,  treeless,  moss- 
covered  granite  domes  that  mask  the  desolate  “East  Main.” 
The  excitement  of  goose-hunting  amongst  them,  the  calls  of 
the  crew,  the  lure  to  firing  range,  the  volleys,  the  plunge  of 
the  kill,  and,  finally,  the  goose-roasting  supper  fires  at  eve- 
ning— we  spitted  them  on  sticks — were  memorable  experi- 
ences. 

Snow  was  flying  and  ice  gripped  the  rails,  deck,  and  rigging 
when  we  reached  Fort  George.  The  factor  gave  me  the  best 
he  had  by  way  of  food  and  shelter  and  arranged  that  as  soon 
as  the  sea  ice  should  form,  I was  to  have  dogs,  sledge,  and  two 
drivers  for  the  next  stage  of  travel  northward. 

By  mid-November,  heavy  frost  was  in  the  air.  The 
mouth  of  the  river  was  soon  sealed,  and  the  ponderous  banks 
of  mist  and  rime  over  the  open  sea  drew  daily  farther  away 
as  the  ice  edge  crept  out.  Then  came  snow,  the  winter’s 
first  big  “drifter,”  and  for  three  days  there  was  no  land  or 
sea  or  sky. 

With  winter  come,  the  decrepit  walls  of  the  old  post 
buildings  were  soon  banked  eave-high  in  a masonry  of  snow 
as  thick  as  the  walls  of  fortresses.  From  the  entrance  of 
the  factor’s  mansion  extended  a long  passage  of  snow  blocks 


THE  BELCHER  ISLANDS 


9 


head  high.  The  servants’  nondescript  summer  garb  gave 
place  to  thick  capotes  of  white  moleskin,  khaki,  and  blue 
Stroud,  trimmed  at  hood  and  cuff  with  fur  of  otter,  mink,  or 
marten. 

The  dogs,  starving  prowlers  of  summer,  now  insolently 
thriving,  overran  the  post,  thieving  among  the  provision 
sheds  and  at  kitchen  doors,  in  concert  howling  to  the  clang- 
ing of  the  post  bell,  and  at  nightfall,  around  the  huge  kettle 
full  of  steaming  cornmeal  and  tallow  as  the  “dog  man” 
cooked  it  over  a leaping  fire  in  the  post  yard,  fighting  mur- 
derously like  wolves.  Unsheltered  from  the  drift  they  slept 
in  moulds  melted  by  their  own  body  heat,  all  but  their  black- 
tipped  muzzles  blanketed  in  snow. 

Hungry  coasters  came  filtering  into  the  post  during  the 
first  week  in  December,  bringing  little  or  no  fur,  so  the  factor 
complained,  but  with  the  usual  tales  of  want  and  distress  on 
their  hungry  lips.  Their  coming  was  the  sign  that  the  sea 
ice  was  sufficiently  safe  for  travel. 

My  outfit,  long  since  prepared,  was  soon  assembled  in  the 
post  yard.  Two  drivers,  nothing  if  not  picturesque  in  their 
fur-trimmed  capotes,  silk-worked  gauntlets,  elbow  long,  and 
leggings  of  blue  stroud,  edged  with  red  and  bound  at  the 
knees  with  beadwork  garters,  bustled  here  and  there  among 
the  throng  of  onlookers,  harnessing  dogs  and  stringing  traces 
to  the  sledge,  while  the  factor  advised  me  as  to  camping 
ground  and  native  shelters,  and  the  missionary  gave  me 
little  notes  of  introduction,  written  in  syllabic  Cree,  to  vari- 
ous of  his  flock  whom  I might  meet  along  the  way.  With 
the  dogs  howling  and  straining  and  leaping  to  their  trace  ends 
my  drivers  made  a hurried  inspection  of  the  sledge  load’s 


lO 


MY  ESKIMO  FRIENDS 


binding;  then,  waving  the  throng  aside,  unlimbered  their 
long  cracking  lash,  and  we  were  away,  helter-skelter,  to  the 
embankment  edge  and  half  tumbling  to  the  river  ice  below. 

From  where  our  course  lay,  far  out  on  the  ice  at  sea,  we 
often  sighted  tepee  smoke  spiralling  above  some  sheltered 
little  wood.  The  team,  when  they  gained  the  scent,  would 
race  madly  toward  it,  plunge  over  the  jagged  tidal  ice  in  full 
career,  and  burst  into  the  encampment  clearing  only  to  en- 
gage with  the  Indians’  dog  army  in  a melee  of  fighting.  The 
inhabitants,  appearing  from  tepee  entrances  with  sticks, 
whips,  or  snowshoes,  or  whatever  they  could  throw,  added 
to  the  din  in  their  efforts  at  separation.  The  fighting  over, 
they  would  lend  a hand  with  my  luggage  and  bundle  me 
into  some  cracking  firelit  tepee  interior.  The  housewives, 
vying  with  one  another,  would  scurry  about  to  fetch  me 
clean  spruce-bough  bedding,  to  dust  the  snow  from  my  fur 
with  their  willow  brooms,  to  heap  fresh  fuel  upon  the  fire,  to 
fetch  in  clean  snow  for  the  “tea  snow  melting,”  and  so  on 
down  to  the  last  detail  concerning  my  comfort  their  watch- 
ful eyes  could  see. 

The  hunters  from  the  other  tepees  would  crawl  in  after  the 
meal  and  lounge  with  us  within  the  red  light  of  the  great 
evening  fire.  They  would  have  me  believe  that  they  merely 
came  for  a yarn  or  two  with  my  drivers  and  news  of  encamp- 
ments and  the  post,  but  I could  see  from  their  appraising 
glances  that  what  concerned  them  most  was  myself — why 
I came  and  whither  I was  bound.  My  driver’s  reply  that  I 
was  making  this  long  journey  for  no  other  purpose  than  to 
see  an  island  of  “iron  rocks”  far  north  in  the  “raw  meat 
eaters”  land  sent  them  into  peals  of  laughter.  The  ex- 


Tht  Geographical  Review,  Vol.  VI,  No.  2, 1918,  Pi  VII 


r 


' i 


r 


,'  i V , 


THE  BELCHER  ISLANDS 


1 1 

planation  that  from  the  “iron  rocks”  are  made  their  guns, 
knives,  and  axes,  was  of  no  avail,  for  the  making  of  such  in- 
explicable things  they  link  with  a higher  power  and  let  it  go 
at  that. 

We  all  slept  as  one  large  family,  men,  women,  cradled 
babes,  and  children  in  a circle  about  the  fire,  sometimes  to  be 
wakened  by  the  wail  of  some  restless  child,  or  by  the  torrent 
of  imprecations  when  some  wolf-muzzled  brute,  having 
chewed  a hole  through  the  tepee  door,  made  a desperate 
sally  upon  the  larder.  The  vents  in  the  tepee’s  cone  were 
large  enough  (one  could  see  patches  of  starlit  sky  beyond)  to 
clear  the  smoke  pall  from  the  dying  fire  and  keep  us  in  cold, 
fresh  air. 

Gradually,  as  we  drew  out  of  the  Indian’s  country,  the 
forests  gave  way  to  dwarfed  and  more  straggled  clumps  of 
trees,  and  the  monotony  of  the  low-lying  coast  was  broken 
abruptly  by  a westward  sweep  of  snow-smoking,  kettle- 
shaped hills — the  peninsula  of  Cape  Jones — the  beginning  of 
the  semi-barrens  of  the  Eskimo. 

We  had  an  up-hill  and  down-dale  journey  of  it  over  the 
Cape — up  long  steep  hills  that  our  tired  team  could  hardly 
climb,  or  coasting  in  wild  career  and  galloping  over  the  disks 
of  tiny  lakes  that  lay  between.  On  the  crest  of  the  last  high 
hill,  from  my  drivers  came  the  exclamation,  “Huskies!” 
(Eskimos)  and  I made  out  three  squares  of  yellow  light 
within  the  deepest  hollow  of  the  hills. 

Three  men,  their  wives,  and  a troop  of  wide-eyed  children 
who  looked  like  young  bear  cubs  in  their  shaggy  fur  clothing 
came  out  to  meet  us  as  we  galloped  down  toward  them. 
They  were  all  of  them  post-trained  Eskimos,  as  their  in- 


12 


MY  ESKIMO  FRIENDS 


congruous  combination  of  trade  clothes  and  native  fur 
costumes  bespoke — native  deerskin  parkas,  the  traders’ 
moleskin  trousers,  sealskin  boots,  and  trade  caps,  much  too 
small  for  their  bulging  crops  of  hair.  The  women  wore 
native  trousers  of  deerskin  and  parkas  of  trade  cloth  edged 
with  red,  blue,  and  yellow  tapes  with  pewter  beads  and 
spoons  and  large  Canadian  pennies  dangling  and  jingling 
from  the  ends  of  them.  One  woman— but  this  was  sheer 
opulence — wore  over  her  shaggy  fur  trousers  a tattered  skirt 
of  gingham. 

With  one  Wetunik,  headman  of  the  encampment,  my 
drivers  arranged  for  a new  relay,  two  Eskimos,  sledge,  and 
dogs  for  me,  and  within  the  hour  turned  back  for  the  nearest 
Indian  camp  to  southward.  Though  a stranger  in  a strange 
land,  for  I could  speak  no  Eskimo,  I experienced  less  in- 
convenience than  might  be  imagined,  so  much  can  one  do 
by  way  of  signs,  pantomime, and  waving  arms.  The  whole 
encampment — men,  women,  and  children — turned  to,  to  help 
me  make  camp,  some  cutting  wood  from  the  stunted  spruces 
near  by,  others  helping  with  the  tent  stakes  and  lashing  can- 
vas. All  was  soon  snug  and  secure  and  my  camp-stove 
fire  vomited  sparks  out  into  the  night.  Beans  and  bacon 
were  frying  on  the  stove,  and  my  eiderdown  was  unrolled  on 
the  tent’s  snow  floor  and  spread  over  robes  of  deerskin. 
Wetunik  and  his  wife  lent  a hand  with  the  cooking,  which, 
though  it  was  done  by  signs  and  gestures,  drove  away  the 
loneliness  of  dining  alone.  Their  enjoyment  of  supper  and 
of  a long  smoke  afterward,  expressed  in  grunting,  smiles,  and 
many  sighs,  was  eloquent  of  the  lean  condition  of  their  lar- 
der, and  when  I loaded  the  paunches  of  their  kooletahs  with 


THE  BELCHER  ISLANDS 


13 


sea  biscuit  and  tobacco,  they  could  only  smile  their  thank- 
fulness and  trudge  away  through  the  drift  to  their  own  camp 
near  by  to  call  out  to  their  waiting  family,  “Nucky”  (food), 
not  halfway  over. 

With  every  mile  on  from  the  camp  of  the  Eskimos,  the 
country  became  more  rugged  and  more  barren.  Great  soil- 
less slopes  of  rock  tumbled  down  to  sea  from  a horizon  of 
increasingly  higher  hills.  Such  trees  as  grew  in  pockets  and 
ice-gouged  hollows  seemed  to  be  no  larger  than  potted  plants. 
There  was  little  game — here  and  there  a ptarmigan  or  a white 
fox  skulked  toward  the  ice  edge  out  at  sea,  or,  sometimes,  like 
a gull  in  the  wake  of  a ship  a lone  raven  followed  our  trail. 

Great  Whale,  the  last  north  post,  was  from  Fort  George 
eight  days  away.  Sundown  on  Christmas  Day  was  our 
twelfth  day  of  sledging,  and  still  no  post  could  we  see. 
Darkness  came.  The  wind  was  bitterly  cold.  Long  since 
I had  given  up  hope  of  reaching  the  post  that  night.  Shelter 
and  scalding  tea  was  all  that  I could  think  of,  when  the  sledge 
shot  out  upon  a sheet  of  black  glare  ice.  It  was  the  river 
ice  of  the  Great  Whale.  A single  square  of  yellow  light 
shone  like  a beacon  through  the  darkness. 

A long  gaunt  figure  clad  in  a hooded  capote  stalked  down, 
lantern  in  hand,  to  greet  us.  He  was  Harold,  the  post’s  half- 
Indian,  half-Swede  interpreter.  When  I stepped  within 
the  glare  of  his  lantern  light,  the  effect  for  the  moment  must 
have  been  that  of  an  apparition,  for  a strange  white  man 
in  this  country,  at  this  season,  was  unheard  of.  I followed 
him  to  his  cabin,  a snug  little  place,  snow-walled  to  the  eaves. 
A great  two-decked  stove,  its  side  glowing  red,  centred  the 
single  large  deal-panelled  room.  An  old  frayed  calendar,  a 


14  MY  ESKIMO  FRIENDS 

few  missionary  lithographs,  and  some  firearms  hung  on  the 
wall. 

Groups  of  Eskimos  utterly  silent  and  staring  whenever  my 
eyes  were  turned  away,  stood  back  to  walls  around  me,  and 
old  Harold’s  wife,  who  for  all  her  white-man’s  shoes  and 
dress  of  flowered  calico,  was  an  Eskimo,  crouched  before  the 
stove.  Old  Harold  sat  beside  her,  embarrassed  and  ill  at 
ease,  gazing  into  space  and  silent  save  when  I questioned 
him.  All  of  this  to  the  lash  of  snow  against  the  cabin  walls, 
the  dogs’  mournful  howls,  and  the  drifters’  unending  drone. 


Ill 


WITH  one  Nero,  old  Harold’s  interpreter,  and  a 
post-servant  Eskimo,  and  a spanking  twelve-dog 
team,  the  last  hundred  and  fifty  miles  of  my  trip 
began.  More  bold  and  rugged  coast  flanked  the  way.  We 
often  crawled  within  shadow  lengths  of  cliflFs  that  rose 
straight  up  from  sea.  The  desolation  grew  with  every  mile, 
and  native  camps  were  few  and  wide  apart.  The  days  were 
cold,  the  sledge  runners  scrunched  over  snow  as  dry  and  as 
gritty  as  sand,  and  the  low  ground  drift  plastered  white  the 
muzzles  of  the  team. 

Nero  was  famed  far  and  wide  as  one  of  two — the  other  was 
his  brother  “Husky  Bill” — who  could  speak,  albeit  in  pidgin 
fashion,  a few  words  of  English.  Our  common  language 
made  for  an  intimacy  between  us.  He  constituted  himself 
my  special  bodyguard.  On  drifting  days  when  to  bare  my 
hands  to  fill  and  light  a pipe  was  much  too  cold,  he  per- 
formed that  office  for  me.  He  was  master  of  the  grub  box 
and  sleeping  bag.  With  his  teeth  he  pulled  off  my  boots  of 
sealskin,  at  turning-in  time  at  night,  and  was  master  of 
ceremonies  generally  at  every  camp  along  the  way. 

Gulf  Hazard,  three  days  on,  marked  the  end  of  trees;  so 
we  put  in  to  a last  little  grove  and  took  on  wood  for  a last 
wood-fire  meal  at  noon.  We  moved  slowly,  bending  into  a 
thick,  drifting  wind.  All,  save  the  black  rock  masses  of  the 
slopes  of  coast  which  loomed  through  veils  of  drift,  was  white 

IS 


i6 


MY  ESKIMO  FRIENDS 


desolation.  We  veered  close  into  the  coast  as  night  ap- 
proached, on  the  watch  for  a camp  ground  within  the  shelter 
of  some  little  cove  or  embankment  arm,  when,  as  we  rounded 
a point,  the  dogs  started  baying,  and  from  Nero  came  the 
word  “Innuet.”  There  was  a momentary  respite  from  the 
blur  of  drift,  and  I barely  made  out  the  domes  of  a village  of 
snow  houses. 

From  the  black  voids  of  igloo  tunnel  mouths  came  shaggy 
beings  on  hands  and  knees  and  the  bounding  forms  of  dogs. 
Leather-faced  as  I was,  and  dressed  as  were  the  men,  the 
Eskimo,  took  me,  for  the  moment,  to  be  one  of  their  own 
kind,  but  when  they  found  their  mistake  there  was  a peal  of 
laughter,  and  peering  close,  they  wrung  my  hand  again, 
with  unintelligible  exclamations  the  while  as  to  the  novelty 
that  Nero  had  brought  amongst  them. 

On  hands  and  knees  through  a low  tunnel  I followed  Nero 
who,  whip-butt  in  hand,  cowed  the  dogs  as  we  brushed  them 
by,  and  within  twenty  feet  squeezed  through  a door  into  a 
large  igloo  dome.  The  housewife,  her  naked  babe  nestled 
warmly  in  the  depths  of  her  kooletah  hood,  turned  from  the 
trimming  of  her  seal-oil  lamp  which  lit  the  white  cavern  with 
a feeble  yellow  cast,  and  welcomed  us.  Her  babe,  too,  poked 
out  its  tiny  naked  arm  for  the  hand-shaking. 

A frozen  seal  carcass  which  lay  on  the  snow  floor,  a nest  of 
yelping  puppies  in  a niche  of  the  igloo  wall,  willow  mats,  and 
robes  of  bear  and  deerskin  were  the  igloo’s  furnishings. 

A supply  of  black  plug  tobacco,  needles,  and  bright- 
coloured  trade  candy  was  a principal  part  of  my  outfit  to  be 
given  as  presents  to  our  various  hosts  along  the  way.  Nero, 
of  course,  officiated  on  occasions  when  the  presents  were 


THE  BELCHER  ISLANDS 


17 

given  out — “sweetie-give-’em”  was  his  name  for  it,  which  at 
this  camp  obtained  the  proportions  of  a small  festival. 

The  result  of  “sweetie-give-’em” — flinging  handfuls  to 
the  scrambling,  squealing  throng,  upended,  their  seal-booted 
legs  thrashing  air — attracted  the  grown-ups  from  the  igloos 
adjoining  and  packed  our  igloo  full.  The  odour  of  skin 
clothes  and  seal-oil  lamp  became  increasingly  intolerable 
until  Nero,  noticing  my  distress,  shooed  them  out  into  the 
open  again,  explaining  diplomatically  that  “Angarooka” 
(the  white  master),  “him  sick  nose!” 

Five  days  in  all  I spent  prowling  about  the  iron-bearing 
cliff  faces  of  the  islands  which  I had  come  all  this  way  to 
examine.  Breaking  off  rock  samples  here  and  there  and 
taking  close-up  photographs  in  the  acid  month  of  January 
were  not  pleasant  tasks,  but  less  pleasant  still  was  the  fact 
that  the  result  of  all  my  examination  showed  that  the  sup- 
posed deposits  of  iron  ore  of  the  Nastapokas  were  too  hope- 
lessly lean  to  be  of  the  slightest  economic  importance.  I 
had  to  face  the  fact  that  all  the  long  journey  had  been  for 
nothing. 

Discouraged,  I was  on  the  point  of  starting  back  for  camp 
in  order  to  pack  and  strike  off  south  again  over  the  gulf  of 
600  miles  that  stood  between  me  and  the  Ground  Hog  fron- 
tier, when  Nero  pointed  out  to  sea  over  leagues  and  leagues  of 
ice  that  lay  before  us  to  a horizon  of  gray-black  rime,  pon- 
derously spiralling.  “Big  land  over  there,”  he  said  and 
added,  explaining  the  source  of  his  information,  “Husky, 
him  say  so.” 

In  a moment,  Wetalltok,  the  Eskimo  of  Charlton  Island, 
sprang  to  mind;  and  I remembered  the  details  of  a certain 


i6 


MY  ESKIMO  FRIENDS 


desolation.  We  veered  close  into  the  coast  as  night  ap- 
proached, on  the  watch  for  a camp  ground  within  the  shelter 
of  some  little  cove  or  embankment  arm,  when,  as  we  rounded 
a point,  the  dogs  started  baying,  and  from  Nero  came  the 
word  “Innuet.”  There  was  a momentary  respite  from  the 
blur  of  drift,  and  I barely  made  out  the  domes  of  a village  of 
snow  houses. 

From  the  black  voids  of  igloo  tunnel  mouths  came  shaggy 
beings  on  hands  and  knees  and  the  bounding  forms  of  dogs. 
Leather-faced  as  I was,  and  dressed  as  were  the  men,  the 
Eskimo,  took  me,  for  the  moment,  to  be  one  of  their  own 
kind,  but  when  they  found  their  mistake  there  was  a peal  of 
laughter,  and  peering  close,  they  wrung  my  hand  again, 
with  unintelligible  exclamations  the  while  as  to  the  novelty 
that  Nero  had  brought  amongst  them. 

On  hands  and  knees  through  a low  tunnel  I followed  Nero 
who,  whip-butt  in  hand,  cowed  the  dogs  as  we  brushed  them 
by,  and  within  twenty  feet  squeezed  through  a door  into  a 
large  igloo  dome.  The  housewife,  her  naked  babe  nestled 
warmly  in  the  depths  of  her  kooletah  hood,  turned  from  the 
trimming  of  her  seal-oil  lamp  which  lit  the  white  cavern  with 
a feeble  yellow  cast,  and  welcomed  us.  Her  babe,  too,  poked 
out  its  tiny  naked  arm  for  the  hand-shaking. 

A frozen  seal  carcass  which  lay  on  the  snow  floor,  a nest  of 
yelping  puppies  in  a niche  of  the  igloo  wall,  willow  mats,  and 
robes  of  bear  and  deerskin  were  the  igloo’s  furnishings. 

A supply  of  black  plug  tobacco,  needles,  and  bright- 
coloured  trade  candy  was  a principal  part  of  my  outfit  to  be 
given  as  presents  to  our  various  hosts  along  the  way.  Nero, 
of  course,  officiated  on  occasions  when  the  presents  were 


THE  BELCHER  ISLANDS 


17 

given  out — “sweetie-give-’em”  was  his  name  for  it,  which  at 
this  camp  obtained  the  proportions  of  a small  festival. 

The  result  of  “sweetie-give-’em” — flinging  handfuls  to 
the  scrambling,  squealing  throng,  upended,  their  seal-booted 
legs  thrashing  air — attracted  the  grown-ups  from  the  igloos 
adjoining  and  packed  our  igloo  full.  The  odour  of  skin 
clothes  and  seal-oil  lamp  became  increasingly  intolerable 
until  Nero,  noticing  my  distress,  shooed  them  out  into  the 
open  again,  explaining  diplomatically  that  “Angarooka” 
(the  white  master),  “him  sick  nose!” 

Five  days  in  all  I spent  prowling  about  the  iron-bearing 
cliflF  faces  of  the  islands  which  I had  come  all  this  way  to 
examine.  Breaking  off  rock  samples  here  and  there  and 
taking  close-up  photographs  in  the  acid  month  of  January 
were  not  pleasant  tasks,  but  less  pleasant  still  was  the  fact 
that  the  result  of  all  my  examination  showed  that  the  sup- 
posed deposits  of  iron  ore  of  the  Nastapokas  were  too  hope- 
lessly lean  to  be  of  the  slightest  economic  importance.  I 
had  to  face  the  fact  that  all  the  long  journey  had  been  for 
nothing. 

Discouraged,  I was  on  the  point  of  starting  back  for  camp 
in  order  to  pack  and  strike  off  south  again  over  the  gulf  of 
600  miles  that  stood  between  me  and  the  Ground  Hog  fron- 
tier, when  Nero  pointed  out  to  sea  over  leagues  and  leagues  of 
ice  that  lay  before  us  to  a horizon  of  gray-black  rime,  pon- 
derously spiralling.  “Big  land  over  there,”  he  said  and 
added,  explaining  the  source  of  his  information,  “Husky, 
him  say  so.” 

In  a moment,  Wetalltok,  the  Eskimo  of  Charlton  Island, 
sprang  to  mind;  and  I remembered  the  details  of  a certain 


i8 


MY  ESKIMO  FRIENDS 


day  when  Johnny  Miller,  the  Company’s  interpreter,  Wetall- 
tok,  and  I were  gathered  around  the  latter’s  old  sea  chest  of 
curios. 

“Yes,  sir,”  Johnny  had  said,  nodding  toward  Wetalltok, 
“he  is  full  of  stories  of  the  North,  sir.  All  the  time  he  is 
talking  of  his  hunting  ground  and  how  long  ’tis  since  he’s 
seen  it;  and  ’tis  a long  time,  I do  know,  for  he’s  been  here 
eighteen  years  with  me.” 

“ But  where  does  he  come  from — the  Great  Whale  Coast?” 
I asked,  hoping  he  might  have  information  of  the  country 
whither  I was  bound. 

“No,  ’tis  islands,  sir,  he  says,  far  off  from  the  Great  Whale 
Coast  at  sea.” 

Then  for  a long  time  Wetalltok  had  talked  to  Johnny  in 
Eskimo.  “He  has  been  telling  me  things  about  them  is- 
lands, sir,”  said  Johnny  when  the  conversation  ended. 

“Where  are  these  islands?”  said  I in  idle  curiosity,  pulling 
out  my  travelling  map.  Wetalltok  scanned  it  long  and 
earnestly,  at  a loss,  I thought,  to  understand;  but  finally  he 
pointed  to  the  little  dots  of  land  marked  on  the  chart  as  the 
Belchers.  “An’  queer  it  is,  sir,”  said  Johnny,  interpreting, 
“but  he  says  the  white  man  makes  his  islands  small  enough.” 

Then  from  a litter,  odds  and  ends  of  tools,  old  carvings  of 
ivory,  harness  toggles,  harpoon  heads,  and  the  like,  Wetall- 
tok drew  out  an  old  coloured  lithograph,  tattered  and  torn. 
On  the  back  of  it,  in  pencil  and  crudely  drawn,  was  a map, 
obviously  handiwork  of  his  own.  “He  says  these  is  the  real 
islands,  sir,”  said  Johnny  as  Wetalltok  spread  it  out  before 
me.  “Here  is  his  old  winter  sealin’  ground,”  as  Wetalltok 
pointed  to  the  spot,  “and  here,”  he  continued,  still  interpret- 


THE  BELCHER  ISLANDS  19 

ing,  “is  where  he  hunted  walrus,  two  days’  kayakin’  farther 
north.” 

“Two  days  by  kayak!”  said  I in  astonishment.  “How 
many  miles,  Johnny,  do  you  think  Wetalltok  could  go  in 
two  days?” 

“Well,  sir,”  said  Johnny,  “the  seventy  miles  from  here  to 
Moose  would  be  easy  travellin’,  sir.” 

Seventy  miles!  I scanned  the  map.  “Good  Lord,  if  that 
is  true,  here  are  islands  that  must  be  a hundred  miles  long.” 

“Yes,  sir,”  said  Johnny,  in  his  most  non-committal  man- 
ner. 

Wetalltok,  carefully  weighing  his  words,  went  on: 

Here  was  the  country  where  the  geese  nested  in  spring, 
and  where,  during  the  summer  days  when  the  geese  had  shed 
their  wing  feathers  and  were  unable  to  fly,  he  and  his  family 
used  to  capture  them  by  running  them  down.  Here  in  an- 
other place  was  the  bear  country,  where  bears  were  many 
when  the  icefields  broke  up  in  spring,  and  here  (pointing 
to  groups  of  little  outlying  islands)  were  the  rookeries  of  sea 
pigeons  and  eiders  that  were  many — they  made  clouds  in  the 
sky.  “And  here” — as  Wetalltok  pointed  to  what  I sup- 
posed, since  it  was  so  extraordinarily  large,  must  be  an 
indentation  of  the  sea — “is  where  he  caught  the  rare  fresh- 
water seal  and  made  his  salmon  kills.  ’Tis  a lake,  sir,”  said 
Miller;  “that  is,  he  says  so,  sir.” 

Then  for  an  interval  Wetalltok  talked  in  Eskimo  to 
Johnny  Miller.  Finally  Miller  continued:  “He  says,  sir, 
from  the  south  end,  and  looking  north,  the  lake  is  like  the 
sea — no  land,  just  water,  and  then  the  sky.” 

If  Wetalltok  had  told  me  that  some  sea  serpent  had  sud- 


HUDSON  BAY  AND  THE  FICTIONARY  BELCHER 
ISLANDS 

As  they  were  shown  on  the  Admiralty  charts.  This  depiction  was  made  by 
Captain  Coates,  a famous  shipmaster  in  the  employ  of  the  Hudson’s  Bay  Company 
in  1700,  and  continued  to  appear  on  the  Admiralty  charts  up  to  the  present  day. 


20 


HUDSON  BAY  AND  THE  REAL  BELCHER  ISLANDS 

As  they  were  shown  to  be  by  Mr.  Flaherty.  For  two  hundred  and  fifty  years  the 
once-a-year  fur  ships  of  the  Hudson’s  Bay  Company  had  been  sailing  within  a few 
miles  of  this  archipelago  with  no  idea  of  its  size. 


21 


MY  ESKIMO  FRIENDS 


22 

denly  risen  froniT the  sea,  picked  him  up  and  carried  him  to 
some  little  Island,  and  then  tenderly  and  carefully  launched 
him  In  the  tip-top  of  some  waving  tree,  his  story  could  hardly 
have  seemed  more  absurd.  What!  Not  only  islands. 
Heaven  knows  how  long,  but  on  one  of  them  a lake  with  a 
horizon  like  the  sea;  and  all  this  mass  of  land  occupying  an 
Admiralty-charted  water,  where  were  plotted  deep-sea  sound- 
ings and  multitudes  of  mere  dots  of  Islands ! How  could  such 
a tale  possibly  be  true?  Why,  the  deep-sea  ships  of  the 
Hudson’s  Bay  Company  through  a period  of  more  than  two 
centuries  must  have  passed  along  not  far  from  them! 

Wetalltok  had  given  me  his  map,  and  I had  accepted  it 
merely  as  a memento  of  a picturesque  liar  of  the  broad  north 
country.  But  now  Nero’s  mention  of  these  strange  Islands 
struck  me  as  being  more  than  a coincidence,  and  I deter- 
mined on  my  return  to  Great  Whale  to  sift  the  source  of 
Nero’s  information  and  satisfy  myself  once  for  all  as  to  the 
truth  of  Wetalltok’s  strange  tale. 

We  were  two  weeks  on  the  return  to  Great  Whale,  en- 
countering the  worst  weather  and  the  hardest  travel  of  the 
year.  For  four  days  on  end  we  were  marooned  on  an  island 
while  the  sea  Ice,  broken,  whilst  we  slept,  from  Its  fastening 
along  the  coast,  sailed  out  to  sea  before  a driving  nor’easter. 
When  the  wind  from  the  west  blew  it  in  again,  it  came  in 
broken  pans  and  rafted  fields.  Some  dog  or  other  kept  fall- 
ing between  the  floes  as  we  picked  our  way  along.  Hauling 
them  out  amid  a din  of  howls,  drying  feet,  and  while  Nero 
pinioned  the  snapping  heads,  freeing  their  toes  of  small  cut- 
ting particles  of  ice,  what  with  the  cold  and  drift,  were,  as 
Nero  said,  “Damn  hard  time.” 


THE  BELCHER  ISLANDS 


23 


Old  Harold  shook  his  head  doubtfully  when  I finished  my 
tale  of  Wetalltok’s  map  and  Nero’s  story.  “We  see  some  of 
them  islanders  every  year,”  said  Harold,  “when  they  come 
in  over  the  sea  ice  to  trade,  and  none  of  them  says  what  mon- 
sters is  them  islands,  sir.” 

I started  on  a new  tack.  “How  many  Eskimos  live  on 
the  island?”  Harold  hesitated  for  a long  while,  then  en- 
gaged Nero  and  his  servants  in  conversation  and  began 
counting  up  the  heads  of  island  families  that  in  years  gone 
by  had  traded  at  Great  Whale.  Finally  came  the  answer, 
“Not  less  than  one  hundred  and  fifty  all  told.” 

“Do  you  think,  then,”  said  I,  “that  a hundred  Eskimos 
could  hunt  their  way,  year  in  and  year  out,  on  any  but  a 
large  mass  of  land?  For,”  I added,  “between  Cape  Jones 
and  Gulf  Hazard,  a distance  of  two  hundred  miles,  there 
are  hardly  more  than  one  hundred  and  fifty  Eskimos,  and 
you  know  the  fight  they  have  for  game.” 

To  make  a long  story  short,  Harold  was  inclined  to  believe 
that  in  Wetalltok’s  map  and  story  there  might  be  something 
more  than  fiction.  For  the  succeeding  two  days  he  closely 
questioned  the  Eskimos  of  all  the  countryside,  and  the  sum 
of  the  information  thus  gained,  though  vague  and  broken, 
gave  more  than  a hint  of  corroboration. 

Down  over  the  sea  ice  to  Moose  Factory,  and  on  up  the 
frozen  Moose,  within  two  months,  I reached  the  “line,” 
and  the  last  of  the  eleven  hundred  miles  of  journeying  was 
over.  Conviction  of  the  truth  of  Wetalltok’s  strange  tale 
had  grown  with  every  mile. 


IV 


^"Tl  ^HE  northern  boundary  of  the  tremendously  impor- 
I tant  iron-ore  field  of  northern  Minnesota  is,  roughly 
speaking,  the  boundary  between  the  United  States 
and  Canada.  For  years  after  the  opening  up  of  these  fabulous 
deposits,  extensions  were  explored  for  on  the  Canadian  side. 
It  seemed  a foregone  conclusion  that  such  were  bound  to 
occur.  For  the  last  twenty-five  years,  however,  thousands 
of  square  miles  throughout  northern  Ontario  have  been  ex- 
plored in  vain.  The  writer’s  father,  as  representative  of 
one  of  the  large  operating  companies  in  Minnesota,  carried 
on  a large  part  of  this  exploration.  We  found  in  the  boulder 
debris  along  various  parts  of  this  Height  of  Land,  iron  ore 
float  similar  in  character  to  some  of  the  Minnesota  ores.  In 
one  region  we  found  it  in  such  quantities  that  extensive  ex- 
plorations were  undertaken  through  the  surrounding  country 
in  an  attempt  to  locate  the  body  of  it  in  the  ground.  The 
source  was  never  found.  When,  however,  I examined  the 
ores  on  the  Nastapokas,  I recognized  at  once  that  they  and 
the  float  that  I had  seen  years  before  were  identical. ^ 


*Dr.  C.  K.  Leith,  who  is  a well-known  authority  on  the  geology  of  northern  Minnesota 
and  Michigan,  made  his  examination  of  the  Nastapokas  during  the  summer  preceding  my 
own  journey.  His  monograph  gives  an  excellent  description  of  the  island  formations; 
his  conclusions,  offered  tentatively  owing  to  the  limited  time  he  had  for  investigation,  he 
summarizes  as  follows: 

“From  an  economic  standpoint  the  repetition  of  essentially  Lake  Superior  conditions  in 
the  Hudson  Bay  country  cannot  but  be  of  interest  . . . when  it  is  remembered  that 

the  enormous  deposits  of  iron,  copper,  nickel,  and  cobalt  on  the  south  side  of  the  Archsan 
protaxis  are,  with  very  few  exceptions,  associated  with  Algonkian  rocks,  and  late  Algonkian 
at  that,  rather  than  with  Archaean  rocks.  There  are  yet  no  discoveries  to  warrant  close 


24 


THE  BELCHER  ISLANDS 


25 


Though  I had  found  nothing  of  economic  interest  in  the 
iron-ore  measures  of  the  Nastapokas,  the  information  which 
I had  received  from  Wetalltok,  the  Eskimo,  that  to  seaward 
of  the  Nastapokas,  “ two  days’  fast  sledging  over  the  sea  ice,  ” 
were  a group  of  islands  which,  if  he  spoke  the  truth,  were 
incredibly  large,  was  in  itself  interesting  enough  as  an  in- 
ducement for  exploration.  But  that  which  made  it  doubly 
interesting  was  a certain  statement  I found  in  a geological  re- 
port upon  my  return  to  Lower  Canada.  The  statement  was 
part  of  a report,  dated  1884,  of  Dr.  Robert  Bell,  to  the  effect 
that  when  in  Nastapoka  country  he  had  received  from  Eski- 
mos who  had  come  in  from  the  islands  out  at  sea  fragments  of 
rock  which  led  him  to  believe  that  the  rock  system  of  these 
islands  was  similar  to  that  of  the  Nastapokas.^ 

If  Doctor  Bell’s  surmise  was  correct  and  Wetalltok’s 
statement  was  anywhere  near  the  truth — discounting  it  by 
half,  the  land  mass  he  described  could  in  area  be  not  less 
than  2,000  square  miles — here  was  work  to  do. 


commercial  comparison  of  the  two  regions.  — “An  Algonkian  Basin  in  Hudson  Bay — A 
comparison  with  the  Lake  Superior  Basin,”  Econ.  Geology,  1910  vol.  V,  pp.  227 — 46;  ref- 
erence on  p.  246. 

iRobert  Bell:  “Observations  on  the  Geology,  Zoology  and  Botany  of  Hudson’s  Strait  and 
Bay,  made  in  1885,”  Report  DD  of  Annual  Kept.  Geol.  Survey  of  Canada,  vol.  I for  1885, 
Montreal,  1885,  p.  14. 

A.  P.  Low  in  one  of  his  reports  refers  to  a projected  exploration  of  the  Belcher  Islands 
that  was  not  carried  out.  Probably  he,  too,  had  received  interesting  information  from  the 
natives  concerning  them.  The  reference  is  of  interest  as  evidence  of  the  ice  conditions 
that  may  obtain  in  the  bay  during  the  summer  months. 

“At  Great  Whale  River  we  were  again  delayed  by  ice  until  the  7th  of  July,  when  we  were 
advised  by  all  the  Eskimos  to  abandon  our  proposed  trips  to  the  Belcher  Islands,  which  lie 
about  seventy  miles  off  the  coast  and  about  which,  owing  to  the  prevalence  of  westerly 
winds  during  the  early  summer,  the  ice  would  be  very  thick.  This  advice  proved  correct 
as  the  Hudson’s  Bay  Company’s  ship.  Lady  Head,  was  beset  with  heavy  ice  as  far  south  as 
Bear  Island  in  James  Bay,  where  the  ice  was  left  on  the  20th  of  August.” 

Probably,  also,  he  had  in  mind  Doctor  Bell’s  remarks  on  certain  rock  specimens  sup- 
posed to  have  been  broken  from  the  fixed  rocks  of  the  Belchers  and  his  belief  that  these 
specimens  indicated  the  extension  to  the  Belchers  of  the  Nastapoka  series. 


26 


MY  ESKIMO  FRIENDS 


To  explore  Wetalltok’s  islands,  then,  was  the  object  of  a 
second  expedition.  At  Moose  Factory  I secured  the  dimin- 
utive 36-foot  Nastapoka  and  engined  her  with  a motor  we 
had  canoed  and  packed  down  from  the  frontier. 

By  the  time  we  had  journeyed  up  the  east  coast  to  Great 
Whale  River,  the  season  was  well  advanced.  Moreover, 
among  the  Eskimos  of  Great  Whale  the  Nastapoka  did 
not  inspire  confidence.  They  looked  askance  at  the  fire- 
spitting, rifle-cracking  innards  of  the  craft.  Much  bar- 
gaining, tempting  offers,  good  old  Harold’s  “fur  trade” 
support,  and  Nero’s  argument  that  “all  same  noise  like  gun 
never  mind,  scare  ’em  seal,  that’s  all,”  finally  overcame  their 
prejudices. 

Old  Harold  celebrated  the  day  we  left — the  Company’s 
standard  flew  from  the  flagpole  and  Eskimo  half-breed  ser- 
vants and  groups  of  children  lined  the  rim  of  the  river’s  high 
bank,  as  we,  far  below  them,  scooted  like  a water  bug  out  to- 
ward the  sea. 

Swinging  up  along  the  bold  flanks  of  the  coast,  for  three 
calm  sunlit  days  we  cruised  happily  along.  Seals  innumer- 
able popped  their  heads  through  the  glass  around  us,  and 
there  were  whirring  flocks  of  ducks  and  eiders,  so  the  crew 
had  food  in  plenty  and  smiled  their  content. 

At  nightfall  of  the  third  day  we  reached  the  point — a small 
island  outlying  the  Gulf  Hazard  mainland  some  five  miles — 
from  which  I planned  to  strike  out  over  the  open  sea  for 
Wetalltok’s  islands.  In  the  only  harbour  available,  one  ex- 
posed to  all  the  winds  save  those  blowing  from  the  west, 
which  then  prevailed,  we  anchored  for  the  night.  But 
within  the  hour  the  wind  chopped  around  and  blew  in  upon 


THE  BELCHER  ISLANDS 


27 


us  from  the  north.  The  wind  rose  as  black  night  settled 
down.  We  paid  out  all  the  anchor  chain,  hoping  to  hang  on 
against  morning.  But  the  Nastapoka^  her  anchors  dragging, 
was  forced  foot  by  foot  toward  shore.  By  midnight  she  was 
piled  aground  while  breaking  seas  flushed  gear  and  food  from 
the  cabin  and  open  hold. 

When  daylight  came  the  battered  Nastapoka  stood  half 
heeled  before  us  on  the  sands.  We  took  stock  of  the  wet 
and  bedraggled  state  of  our  affairs.  The  Eskimos,  their 
minds  on  food,  combed  the  beach.  As  they  were  out  of 
sight  for  some  little  time  I set  out  to  find  them.  They  were 
not  far  distant,  huddled  behind  a group  of  boulders,  bent 
double,  their  arms  wrapped  about  their  middles  and  in  chorus 
groaning.  Lying  near  them  were  the  empty  containers  of  a 
considerable  quantity  of  dried  apples  upon  which  of  course 
they  had  stuffed  themselves  and  then — drunk  water! 

After  three  days  of  caulking,  patching,  and  re-rigging  the 
Nastapoka' s running  gear  and  mending  torn  and  tattered 
sails,  we  limped  on  down  to  Great  Whale  Post.  By  the 
time  we  arrived  the  sailing  season  was  over. 

Then,  said  Nero,  he  would  see  me  to  Wetalltok’s  islands. 
With  dogs  and  sleds,  he  said,  we  would  cross  over  the  ice- 
fields in  winter,  during  the  six  weeks  of  February  and  March 
when  the  ice  is  immovable.  We  shook  hands  over  it  and 
agreed  to  wait  until  the  “seeco  [ice],  him  strong.” 

Before  Nero  and  I could  begin  the  journey,  five  months 
must  elapse.  I sounded  Mavor,  the  factor,  as  to  the  possi- 
bility of  wintering  with  him,  but  a rough  inventory  of  his 
mess  supply  showed  a meagre  quantity  of  food  barely  suffi- 
cient for  his  own  needs.  So  I prepared  to  travel  180  miles 


MY  ESKIMO  FRIENDS 


south  to  more  opulent  Fort  George.  No  “York”  boat  crew 
at  this  late  season  was  obtainable.  They  feared  being 
caught  by  the  freeze-up  on  the  way.  The  bruised  and 
battered  Nastapoka  was  useless.  By  canoe  was  the  only 
way.  Poor  Mavor,  in  his  eighth  year  of  factorship  at  God- 
forsaken old  Great  Whale,  was  loath  to  see  me  go.  He  felt 
that  he  must  go  too  if  for  nothing  more  than  the  change  of 
scene;  the  loneliness  he  said  was  “getting”  him.  So  he  made 
old  Harold  his  deputy,  and  we  launched  out  in  a post  canoe 
for  Fort  George  with  a “You’ll  be  froze  in  on  the  way,  sir,” 
from  old  Harold  ringing  in  our  ears. 

Five  and  a half  months  later  found  me  back  again  at 
Great  Whale.  Nero  had  come  down  a hundred  miles  from 
his  hunting  ground  and  was  waiting,  Harold,  however, 
gave  me  disquieting  news.  The  islanders’  annual  migration 
into  the  post  for  trade  had  not  materialized — they  were,  he 
said,  weeks  overdue.  “I  doesn’t  understand  it,  sir,”  said 
he,  “the  huskies  here  says  the  ice  is  strong  and  holdin’  all 
along  the  coast.  But  their  not  coming  means  there’s  some- 
thing wrong  with  it  somewhere,  sir.”  Nero,  however,  ex- 
plained the  delay — “Seals,  him  not  plenty.  When  seals 
him  plenty,  him  come  sure.”  Waiting  in  vain  for  the 
glimpse  of  black  specks  winding  through  the  rough  icefields 
out  at  sea,  Nero  and  I decided  finally  to  start,  islanders  or  no 
islanders. 

It  was  long  after  sleep-time.  With  all  our  plans  settled 
for  the  following  morning’s  departure,  I pulled  on  my  koole- 
tah  and  prepared  to  trudge  over  to  my  own  sleeping  quarters 
and  turn  in.  From  out-of-doors  came  the  din  of  howling 
and  snarls  and  yells  and  yelps  of  fighting.  A sledge  or  more 


THE  BELCHER  ISLANDS 


29 

of  natives  had  arrived.  The  door  burst  in  and  an  old 
Eskimo,  one  Pitchalock,  of  Little  Whale,  brushing  the  drift 
from  his  deer-fur  clothing,  strode  into  the  room.  Drinking  a 
pannikin  of  scalding  tea,  he  rattled  out  unintelligible  words 
the  while — “seeco,”  “annohie,”  “komitik,”  “cukuktinnie.” 
Eventually  we  gathered  that  three  sleeps  to  northward  the 
ice,  broken,  was  driving  out  to  sea.  On  one  driving  pan  was 
a team  of  dogs  entangled  in  their  harnesses,  the  dogs  of 
islanders.  Harold  surmised  that  they  had  been  caught  by 
the  break-up  on  crossing  over. 

“’Tis  bad  luck  you’re  havin’,  sir,”  said  old  Harold,  “for 
in  the  twenty-eight  years  I have  been  here,  ’tis  only  the 
second  time  the  ice  has  broke.” 


When  six  months  later  I returned  to  Lower  Canada,  Sir 
William,  with  a persistence  altogether  characteristic,  said, 
“Get  a ship.”  This  meant  a Newfoundland  schooner  and 
crew  and  a cruise  north  along  the  Labrador  and  through 
Hudson  Strait  and  south,  this  time  along  the  upper  half  of 
the  East  Main  of  Hudson  Bay.  The  topsail  schooner  Laddie^ 
seventy-five  feet  over  all  and  eighty-five  tons  net  register, 
was  purchased  for  the  work. 

The  Laddie  had  been  through  Hudson  Strait  before. 
“But  no  glory  to  ’er,”  one  of  my  crew  informed  me.  “She 
had  three  mounted  police  aboard  an’  relief  for  the  police 
post  at  Cape  Fullerton,  on  the  west  side  of  the  Bay.  When 
she  reached  the  Strait,  what  wasn’t  head  wind  was  ice — big 
Fox  Channel  ice,  miles  and  miles  of  it,  swingin’  out  for  the 
North  Atlantic.  By  the  time  she  cleared  the  ice  September 
was  come,  an’  there  was  more  winds,  head  on.  Well,  sir. 


30 


MY  ESKIMO  FRIENDS 


she  beat  till  she  was  almost  in  sight  of  the  hungry  post  at 
Cape  Fullerton.  Then  snow  come,  an’  a heavy  gale.  She 
got  a drubbin’,  sir.  In  four  days  she  was  near  halfway  back 
to  the  Strait.  Says  the  skipper,  ‘Relief  for  Fullerton  or  no, 
the  Laddie  clears  for  Newfoundland.’  And  she  did.” 

For  four  weeks  the  Laddie^  in  dock,  was  re-rigged  and  over- 
hauled from  bow  to  stern,  and  belted  with  greenheart  to 
shield  her  from  the  ice.  When  we  had  stuffed  and  crammed 
and  stowed  away  our  outfit  in  her  hold  she  stood  burdened 
to  the  rails,  with  lumber  for  winter  huts,  oil — fifty  barrels  of 
it  in  nets  lashed  together — and  the  long  winter’s  coal  in  bags 
piled  high.  Our  fresh  beef  and  bags  of  vegetables  swung 
from  the  rigging  and  ladder-ways. 

The  old  sea  dogs  who  for  days  had  been  hanging  about  the 
wharf  predicted  as  the  time  dragged  on  that  we  were  “o’er 
late  to  go  pokin’  up  through  Hudson  Strait.”  O’er  late  we 
were,  but  at  last  the  great  day,  the  14th  of  August,  came. 
With  a chantey,  the  crew  winched  the  anchors  to  the  rails. 
There  were  salutes  from  the  fishing  craft  around.  A pom- 
pous little  tug  made  fast  our  hawser,  and  slowly  towed  us 
through  the  bottle  neck  of  St.  John’s  Harbour.  Forests  of 
masts  and  long  fingers  of  wharves,  our  last  sight  of  civiliza- 
tion slowly  panoramed  from  view,  and  as  the  friendly  tug 
let  go  our  hawser  and  stepped  aside,  we  rolled  out  into  the 
long  swells  of  the  North  Atlantic. 

From  the  mild  blue  skies  of  Newfoundland,  within  the 
fortnight  we  were  a thousand  miles  to  northward  running 
close-hauled  through  squalls  of  snow  into  the  mouth  of 
Hudson  Strait.  The  giant  cliffs  of  Resolution,  rising  sheer 
from  a white  lash  of  sea,  were  our  first  sight  of  land  north 


THE  BELCHER  ISLANDS 


31 

of  Labrador.  From  Resolution  into  the  bare  rock  flanks  of 
the  Strait's  north  coast,  Baffin  Land,  the  days  were  fair 
enough,  light  catspaws  of  wind  and  gray  snowy-looking 
skies.  Here  and  there  bergs  of  gigantic  size  sailed  proudly 
with  the  tide.  Streams  of  emerald  cascaded  over  their 
flanks.  Strata  of  gulls  stood  etched  against  the  gray-white 
immensity  of  their  walls. 

On  from  the  “saddle-backs,”  the  smooth  rounded  mass  of 
coast  with  its  clean,  long,  curving  lines  of  shore  gave  way  to 
broken,  erratic  sweeps  masked  by  multitudes  of  little  high 
rock  islands.  Washed  by  enormous  tides,  at  flood  whole 
groups  of  them  were  reefs  or  under  sea.  “No  water  for  an 
honest  ship,  sir,”  said  the  skipper.  Carefully  sounding  our 
way,  we  crawled  into  a nest  of  islands  for  the  night’s  shelter. 
We  threw  both  anchors  into  the  good  mud  bottom  of  a little 
island’s  enfolding  arms,  into  what  the  lead  line  showed  was 
seven  fathoms  fore  and  aft.  All  hands  but  the  watch  turned 
in  to  sleep.  The  night  was  still.  No  breath  of  wind.  The 
aurora  raked  to  and  fro  across  the  sky.  I was  still  awake 
when  the  watch,  clattering  to  the  companionway,  bawled, 
“She’s  grounding,  sir!”  While  we  held  our  lanterns  over- 
head and  tried  to  peer  down  into  the  darkness,  she  slowly 
began  heeling  until  she  lay  on  her  beam-ends,  high  and  dry. 
The  deck  load,  lumber,  coal,  and  casks  of  oil,  I feared,  would 
slide  through  the  bulwarks;  but  unable  to  see,  all  we  could 
do  was  to  cling  through  the  night  to  the  rigging  and  ladders 
of  the  upper  rail.  When  at  last  daylight  came,  we  found 
that  the  Laddie  was  berthed  in  a cushion  of  soft  mud  and 
ooze.  A reef,  over  which  her  back  would  have  broken  had 
she  stranded  there,  lay  less  than  ten  feet  away. 


3^ 


MY  ESKIMO  FRIENDS 


We  zigzagged  in  our  attempts  to  beat  through  the  five 
hundred  miles  of  Strait,  from  the  island  mask  of  Baffin  Land, 
south  to  the  sheer  thousand-foot  coast  of  Cape  Hope’s  Ad- 
vance and  Wakeham  Bay,  for  the  winds  and  squalls  of  snow 
were  baffling.  Too  late  to  gain  a wintering  base  in  the  Bay, 
we  put  into  Amadjuak  Bay  three  hundred  and  fifty  miles  in 
on  the  coast  of  Baffin  Land.  Here  with  the  aid  of  some  forty 
Eskimos,  enthusiastic  over  the  advent  of  the  “kablunak,” 
with  his  precious  stores  and  goods  for  trade,  ship  was  dis- 
charged by  dories  and  kayaks  of  the  Eskimos  catamaraned. 
Where  they  disgorged  on  rocky  ledges  of  shore,  old  men, 
women  with  babes  bobbing  in  their  hoods,  and  children  of 
assorted  sizes  in  an  antlike  stream,  packed  boxes,  bales,  and 
bundles  over  the  rocks  to  the  wintering  base  site.  Within  a 
week  a village  of  topeks  (tents  of  sealskin)  along  with  four 
white  wedges  of  tents  of  canvas  and,  in  the  centre  of  them 
all,  our  hut  of  white  lumber  roofed  with  black  tar  paper  stood 
looking  out  over  the  bare  rock  desolation. 

By  the  last  week  of  September  my  three  men  and  I were 
settled  for  the  year  and  the  good  old  Laddie/]\ist  the  day  be- 
fore the  first  skin  ice  formed  over  the  harbour’s  face,  sailed 
slowly  out,  bound  for  her  winter  berth  in  Newfoundland. 

Through  the  ten  months  of  winter  we  had  enough  to  do. 
There  were  two  thousand  miles  of  sledging  along  the  coast 
and  reconnaissances  inland  to  the  great  lake  of  Amadjuak. 
There,  too,  was  the  task  of  filming  as  much  as  might  be  of 
the  lives  of  the  Eskimos.  But  all  of  this  is  another  story. 

When  the  winter  had  finally  worn  away,  through  the 
long  light  of  warm  July  days  we  watched  each  new  patch  of 


THE  BELCHER  ISLANDS 


33 


blue-green  water  where  it  shone  resplendent  among  the  white 
waste  of  the  icefields  at  sea.  But  of  signs  of  a break-up 
there  were  none.  Even  when  August  came,  Eskimos, 
bringing  us  the  eggs  of  gulls  and  eiders,  were  sledging  still 
over  the  ice  from  distant  lands.  “The  summer  is  slow  in 
coming,”  they  said,  and  they  worried  over  it  too,  for  the 


ROUTE  OF  THE  SCHOONER  LADDIE 

From  St.  John’s  to  Moose  Factory  the  trip  took  more  than  a year.  Because 
of  the  late  start,  Mr.  Flaherty  and  his  party  were  forced  to  winter  at  Amadjuak  Bay, 
sending  the  Laddie  back  to  St.  John’s.  The  following  summer  the  schooner  returned. 
She  was  nearly  crushed  in  an  ice  pack,  but  escaped  and  picked  up  the  party  at 
Amadjuak  Bay,  continuing  toward  the  Belcher  Islands.  She  was  wrecked  in  a fog, 
but  managed  to  get  off  the  rocks  at  high  tide,  and  made  a landing  on  the  Belchers. 
Her  condition  was  so  bad,  however,  that  she  was  taken  to  Moose  Factory  for  re- 
pairs, delaying  the  real  work  of  exploration  until  the  next  summer. 


34  my  ESKIMO  FRIENDS 

time  of  their  summer  migration  along  the  coast  was  near  at 
hand. 

Not  until  the  tenth  day  of  August  did  we  waken  to  see, 
where  so  long  had  lain  the  great  white  waste  of  ice,  the  blue- 
green  of  open  sea.  To  the  highest  hill  of  the  harbour’s 
mouth  I sent  one  of  our  families  of  Eskimos  to  encamp,  to 
signal  us  with  a moss-fire  smoke  as  soon  as  the  Laddie  hove 
in  view. 

The  summer  was  nearly  gone  when  on  the  nineteenth  of 
August  the  Laddie  sailed  in  to  our  relief.  Hemmed  in  by 
ice  along  Labrador,  for  nearly  two  months  she  had  been  en 
route.  “We  was  nipped  in  Grey  Straits,  sir,’’  he  continued, 
“what  with  the  ice  raftin’  an’  pilin’  up  around  us  an’ 
a-squeezin’  so.  Ne’er  a door  would  open.  Even  the  fuel  tank 
to  the  starboard  was  busted.  I thought  it  would  raft  to  the 
yardarms.  With  ’lasses  and  hardtack  and  matches  in  a bot- 
tle and  fuel  and  a bit  of  clothin’,  charts,  and  a compass  we 
unlimbered  the  dories  and  made  off  on  an  ice  pan  and  stood 
there  listenin’  to  ’er  timbers  creakin’  and  groanin’  and  the 
thuddin’  of  the  ice  pilin’  and  pilin’  up  around  her.  I turned 
to  figurin’  out  how  we  could  haul  the  dories  over  the  ice  to 
open  water.  I climbed  some  rafted  ice  to  get  a sight  for  a 
course  through  it  when  right  before  me  eyes  I saw  a lead  of 
blue  water,  and  widenin’  as  I watched  it.  ’Twas  the  tide 
on  the  turn,  sir,  and  I knew  that  once  more  I’d  be  climbin’  up 
over  the  Laddie's  rail.  And  sure  enough  the  ice  slackened  off, 
sir,  and  we  was  away  two  hours  on  with  a bone  in  our  teeth.” 

Within  a week  we  were  ready  to  sail,  bound  at  last  for 
Wetalltok’s  mysterious  land.  The  wintering  base  now  dis- 
mantled was  a forlorn  and  empty  shell.  To  the  faithful  and 


‘^revillqn  freres,n.v. 


•«C|^ 


.>#V 


ESKIMO  OMIAK  IN  THE  SPRING 


THE  BELCHER  ISLANDS 


35 


kindly  Eskimos  who  had  served  us  so  well,  we  gave  out  the 
last  we  had — a mirror  with  a gilt  frame,  old  blankets,  cloth- 
ing, old  shoes,  precious  bits  of  metal,  and  an  old  alarm 
clock  with  one  hand,  knives,  old  pots  and  kettles  and  pans, 
and  most  wonderful  of  all,  some  oranges  from  the  Laddie — 
“peeruwalluk  pumwa”  (the  very  best  of  all  that  is  sweet), 
they  said.  Enraptured,  they  rubbed  them  against  their 
noses. 

We  said  our  good-byes  regretfully  enough.  Anxiously 
they  inquired  if  ever  they  should  see  us  again.  I had  not  the 
courage  to  be  definite  on  that  point;  I knew  that  when  sum- 
mer again  rolled  around  they  would  climb  to  the  highest  hill, 
hopeful  for  a sight  of  us. 


V 


WE  HAD  clear  water  through  the  Straits,  for  the 
migration  of  the  icefields  to  the  North  Atlantic 
from  Hudson  Bay  had  long  since  passed.  Follow- 
ing the  snow-capped  cliffs  of  Wolstenholme  which  lean  a 
thousand  feet  down  to  sea,  we  turned  into  Hudson  Bay. 
Within  thirty  miles  the  giant  blocks  of  coast  had  stepped 
down  to  a mere  thread  of  land  apparently  no  higher  than 
the  scattered  ice  pans  which  drifted  by  at  sea.  The  only 
break  in  a hundred  miles  of  its  monotony  was  the  brow  of 
Cape  Sir  Thomas  Smith  still  alight  with  the  last  yellow  flood 
of  a big,  drowsy  ball  of  sun. 

On  the  third  day  we  hit  the  Ottawas,  the  northernmost  of 
the  groups  of  islands  which,  as  the  maps  show,  parallel  the 
East  Main  for  a distance  of  some  four  hundred  miles.  Along 
the  line  of  this  group,  south  some  two  hundred  miles,  we 
hoped  to  find  Wetalltok’s  land.  Black  barren  masses  of  vol- 
canic rock  are  the  Ottawas.  There  is  not  even  the  tawn  and 
russet  of  the  mosses  to  relieve  their  bleak  desolation.  As  we 
wore  into  the  coast,  the  mate  climbed  to  the  crow’s-nest  on  a 
lookout  for  a break  ahead  which  might  lead  into  a harbour. 
Flocks  of  eiders  from  rock  ledges  of  the  shore  rose  in  alarm  as 
we  approached,  and  in  whirring  flights  circled  us.  The 
screams  of  gulls  were  constantly  in  the  air.  A herd  of  walrus, 
holding  to  the  edge  of  a drifting  ice  pan  with  their  gleaming 
tusks,  let  go  and  with  a resounding  splash  dived  from  view. 

36 


THE  BELCHER  ISLANDS 


37 


Suddenly  the  mate’s  bawling,  “Man  ahead,  sir,”  brought 
us  with  a rush  to  the  ladder-ways.  In  a moment  more  we 
stood  abreast  of  a yawning  mouth  of  harbour  and  before  us 
stood  a ship  riding  at  anchor,  beyond  it,  on  shore,  a hut,  and 
beside  it  a flag  mast  from  which  a Union  Jack  was  breaking 
out  upon  the  wind. 

The  Active  she  proved  to  be,  one  of  the  veteran  whalers 
of  Dundee.  Having  completed  her  winter  and  summer 
whaling,  she  was  about  to  clear  again  for  Scotland.  Both 
the  winter  and  summer,  they  said,  had  been  hard — little 
chance  for  whales.  The  winter  was  one  of  constant  gales 
and  nearly  all  the  summer  through  they  had  been  hemmed 
in  by  vast  fields  of  ice.  They  were  on  the  last  legs  of  their 
rations;  one  of  the  crew,  with  a drawn  and  doleful  face, 
begged  of  me  whatever  “soft”  food  I might  have — “oatmeal 
and  the  like,  sir” — then  showed  me  a toothless  pair  of  gums. 

“Do  you  mean  to  tell  me,”  said  I,  “that  you  had  the 
hardihood  to  leave  Scotland  without  a tooth  in  your  head?” 

“No,  sir,”  said  he,  “but  you  know  how  it  is,  sir,  a few 
drinks  before  you  leave  and  then  the  wee  bit  of  an  upset  the 
day  after,  sir,  what  with  the  ship’s  rollin’  an’  all;  so  to  tell 
you  the  truth,  sir,  I heaved  them  over  the  rail,  sir!” 

During  the  winter  two  of  the  ship’s  harpooners  had  died 
of  delirium  tremens.  The  last  trace  we  saw  of  the  Active  as 
we  swung  oflF  for  the  south  were  two  wooden  crosses,  grim 
silhouettes  against  the  sky. 

Icefields  lay  not  far  from  us.  All  day  long  an  ice  “blink” 
loomed  in  the  west.  “If  the  wind  swings,  ’tis  fog  we’ll  be 
havin’,  sir,”  the  skipper  said.  And  sure  enough  by  morning 
great  banks  of  it  lay  around  us.  As  the  day  wore  on,  how- 


MY  ESKIMO  FRIENDS 


38 

ever,  it  thinned  to  a milky  haze,  but  notwithstanding,  we 
almost  bumped  into  one  low-worn  rib  of  rock.  On  an  hour 
farther,  though  there  was  no  land  in  view,  we  looked  down 
through  the  emerald  to  the  bouldery  bottom  of  the  shoals. 
Carefully  for  three  days  we  crept  on.  Some  one  of  the  crew 
was  constantly  in  the  crow’s  nest  and  the  leadsman  stood 
always  ready  in  the  bow.  We  had  no  suns  for  latitude,  but 
at  nightfall  the  log  showed  a southing  from  the  Ottawas  of 
two  hundred  miles — we  were  at  last  in  the  neighbourhood  of 
Wetalltok’s  islands. 

“But  we  might  as  well  be  in  the  neighbourhood  of  a reef 
or  two,  what  with  this  fog  and  all,”  was  the  captain’s  obser- 
vation. “We  ought  to  be  up  and  out  of  it,  sir,  to  a snug  har- 
bour until  it  comes  clear  again.  ’Tis  one  thing  we  know,  sir 
— the  mainland  is  to  east’ard  and  no  more  nor  seventy  miles 
with  a harbour  waiting  us.  With  no  sun  for  sights  and  only 
a log  and  dead  reck’nin’  clean  down  from  the  Ottawas  and 
tides  playin’  hell  with  us  the  while — why,  as  ’tis,  sir,  we’re 
nowhere.” 

So  we  squared  away  before  a light  wind  and  laid  a course 
through  the  night,  the  captain  cheerful  over  the  prospect  of 
what  he  called  the  “tender  arms”  of  a harbour  before  morn- 
ing. The  timid  piping  of  the  wind,  the  rattle  of  blocks 
along  the  boom,  and  the  monotone  of  a song  from  the  helms- 
man were  the  only  sounds. 

“Well,  sir,”  said  the  skipper  finally,  looking  up  from  his 
game  of  solitaire  on  the  cabin  table,  “delay  or  no,  it’s  lucky 
we’re  gettin’  clear  of  it  all.  We’ll  be  ridin’  at  anchor  by 

mornin’  in  a fine,  fine ” when  crash!  bang!  we  pitched 

in  a heap  to  the  floor. 


THE  BELCHER  ISLANDS 


39 


A wild  ground-swell  broke  over  the  stern,  picked  up  the 
Laddie  and  hurled  her  with  thuds  that  sent  the  lamps,  the 
charts,  telescopes,  guns,  and  shelf-loads  of  crockery  crashing 
to  the  floor,  into  the  teeth  of  a boiling  reef.  The  rifle-like 
cracking  of  sails,  the  hiss  and  slosh  and  din  of  breaking  seas, 
and  the  pounding  of  the  Laddie  up  and  down,  up  and  down — 
I thought  the  spars  and  rigging  would  rattle  out  of  her. 
When  we  peered  down  over  the  rails  to  nests  of  boulders  and 
the  wash  of  seas,  splinters  the  length  of  a man  rose  up  and 
drifted  off"  into  the  void.  There  was  no  launching  the  dories 
in  that  blackness,  we  could  only  hope  the  Laddie  would  hold 
till  morning.  “All  hands  to  the  hold  !”  sang  out  the  captain, 
and  we  dug  up  her  boulder  ballast  piece  by  piece  and  passing 
it  through  a chain  of  hands,  dropped  it  over  the  rail.  We 
stripped  the  Laddie  to  the  skin,  which  heaved  as  her  bottom 
struck  the  bar.  We  gave  her  up  then  and  climbed  to  deck, 
provisioned  the  dories,  and  waited  for  dawn. 

When  dawn  did  come  a blanket  of  fog  lay  around  us.  The 
wind,  however,  had  died  and  the  sea  smoothed  out  to  long 
rolls  of  glass.  A blur  of  yellow  burned  through  the  milk  of 
sky.  In  an  hour  the  fog  began  melting  away,  and  a half 
mile  to  starboard  an  island  stood  out  through  the  dissolv- 
ing mists.  With  the  dories  we  put  off,  wallowing  through 
the  dying  swells  and  on,  sprawling  on  crests  of  surf,  in  to 
shore. 

It  was  not  much  of  an  island — a level,  soilless  bed  of  rock, 
a mere  platform  rising  out  of  sea.  A ring  of  boulders  at  one 
place  showed  where  long  since  had  stood  the  topek  of  some 
wandering  Eskimos.  Near  by  was  a seal-oil  lamp  which, 
fashioned  out  of  a piece  of  driftwood,  had  been  made  in  an 


40 


MY  ESKIMO  FRIENDS 


emergency  and  seemed  to  point  to  the  fact  that  whoever  had 
camped  there  had  met  with  misadventure,  perhaps  the 
break-up  of  the  ice  while  travelling  on  the  icefields. 

Caching  among  boulders  all  the  freight  of  food  and  gear 
the  dories  had  brought  ashore,  we  returned  to  ship  to  take 
off  the  last  odds  and  ends  before  we  abandoned  her.  We 
found  to  our  amazement  that  though  the  tide  was  near  flood 
there  was  not  much  water  in  the  well. 

“By  gad,  sir,”  the  skipper  said,  “though  with  my  own 
eyes  I saw  enough  splinters  cornin’  up  and  floatin’  off  to  make 
a raft,  yet  here  she  is,  sir,  dry  as  a bone.  Not  only  that,  sir, 
but  if  the  tide  come  high,  and  it  should,  sir,  what  with  all 
these  winds  blowin’  from  the  one  quarter,  there’s  the  chance 
that  we  can  hobble  her  over  the  reef.” 

So  to  work  we  went  with  a will.  Thirty-five  casks  of  oil, 
all  that  remained  of  heavy  cargo,  we  threw  into  the  sea,  then 
dropped  an  anchor  some  300  feet  ahead,  put  on  all  sails,  and 
opened  up  the  engine.  With  “heave-ho’s”  from  the  crew 
winding  at  the  winch  and  “Now  she  comes,  me  byes,  now 
she  comes,”  from  the  skipper,  slowly,  inch  by  inch,  the 
Laddie  moved.  The  crew  broke  out  into  a chantey  as  she 
gathered  way.  “An  alligator,  I calls  her,”  the  skipper 
cried  and  called  for  a “mug  up”  for  all  hands.  When  a 
light  breeze  an  hour  on  tore  up  the  last  shrouds  of  fog  which 
had  lain  over  us  so  long,  it  revealed  the  hole  into  which  we 
had  poked  the  Laddie's  nose.  The  white  boils  of  reefs  were 
everywhere.  In  no  direction  could  we  see  a single  straight 
lane  of  water  through  which  the  Laddie  could  get  out  to  open 
sea.  I knew  then  that  the  reason  we  had  not  run  aground 
was  that  a strong  magnetic  attraction  had  kept  swinging  the 


THE  BELCHER  ISLANDS 


41 


compass  by  which  the  helmsman  kept  his  course.  Literally, 
the  Laddie  had  wound  her  way  into  land. 

“’Tis  no  place  fur  us,  sir,”  said  the  skipper,  and  he  hailed 
the  mate  and  two  of  the  crew  who  had  gone  off  to  the  island 
for  fresh  water. 

“WeVe  seen  big  land,  sir,”  they  called  as  they  clambered 
up  over  the  rail,  and  explained  that  they  had  glimpsed  it 
when  they  climbed  a hill  on  the  island. 

“ Big  land  ? ” says  the  skipper.  “You  means  the  mainland.” 

“Naw,  sir,”  said  the  mate,  “what  land  we  seen  lays  to 
westward  and  there’s  sixty  miles  or  more  of  it,  for  ’tis  spread 
over  nine  points  of  the  compass,  sir.” 

We  could  see  it  from  the  rigging  and  of  its  identity  there 
was  no  doubt;  the  blue  loom  which  lay  along  the  rim  of  that 
gray  waste  of  sea  could  be  no  other  than  Wetalltok’s  land. 

With  the  water  casks  hauled  up  and  lashed  into  their 
cradles  we  were  out  of  it  soon  enough.  Before  sundown  (the 
log  read  twenty  miles)  we  hove  to  off  the  northeastern  por- 
tion of  the  new-found  coast.  Cautiously  sounding,  we  crept 
through  a bottle  neck  into  a small  rock-bound  harbour.  The 
clank  and  clangour  of  the  anchor  chains  pouring  out  through 
the  hawse  pipes  sent  flocks  of  eiders  a-whirring  round  us.  A 
long  string  of  geese  honked  wildly  as  they  flapped  awkwardly 
away.  A gorgeous  silver  fox  scurried  into  the  crevices  of  a 
great  pile  of  rocks. 

Up  over  the  moss  carpet  of  a valley,  a shallow  groove  in 
bare  rock  slopes,  I climbed  to  a vantage-point  from  which, 
as  far  as  the  eye  could  see,  north,  south,  and  west,  lay  range 
upon  range  of  hills.  The  valleys  between  them  were  moss- 
grown  sweeps  of  tawn  and  russet  strangely  like  cultivated 


42 


MY  ESKIMO  FRIENDS 


fields.  Among  them  here  and  there  were  the  green  and 
silver  disks  of  lakes  and  ponds,  and  between  two  distant 
jagged  lines  lay  a long  blue  tongue  of  sea. 

Not  only  in  the  red  bands  of  marl  and  shale,  and  in  the 
distant  masses  of  yellow  which  were  quartz  sites,  and  in 
the  white-grays  which  were  limestones  was  the  land  mass, 
as  I had  hoped,  an  extension  of  the  ore-bearing  series  of  the 
mainland.  Though  it  was  barely  exposed,  I stumbled  over 
ore  itself — rich  stuff  which  lay  heavy  in  my  hands! 

But  here  we  were,  on  the  last  legs  of  food  and  gear,  with 
the  ship  almost  broken  down.  The  skipper  said  she  was 
leaking  badly,  and  what  with  the  September  gales  and  snow- 
storms which  were  near  at  hand  we  should  be  “up  and  out  of 
it,  headin’  south  with  all  the  sail  we  has.”  For  two  days, 
however,  in  which  the  crew  were  busy  overhauling  sailing 
gear  and  ballasting  ship,  we  made  reconnaissances  inland  and 
south  along  the  coast.  We  saw  the  blue  rims  of  more  new 
land,  all  of  it  made  up  of  the  black  ribs  of  eruptives,  the 
terra  cotta  and  the  red  and  white  and  yellow  ribbons  of 
the  Nastapoka  rocks.  There  was  no  sight  of  natives  but  the 
boulder  rings  of  their  old  camp  grounds  were  everywhere. 

Reluctantly,  at  daylight  of  the  third  day,  we  put  out  for 
the  south. 

At  Great  Whale  River  Post,  we  received  the  first  news, 
albeit  it  was  two  months  old,  of  the  great  busy  world  outside. 
We  picked  up  the  mouth  of  the  Great  Whale  too  late  to  get 
in  over  the  river  bars  to  the  post.  With  three  of  the  crew,  I 
unlimbered  the  launch  but,  confused  by  the  darkness,  whilst 
threading  through  the  bars,  we  were  caught  by  a sweep  of 
surf  and  thrown  up  upon  a narrow  spit  ot  sand.  Up  river, 


i.': 


THE  BELCHER  ISLANDS 


43 


a mile  and  a half  away,  shone  two  squares  of  yellow  light, 
windows  of  one  of  the  cabins  of  the  post.  Unable  to  see 
through  the  boils  of  surf,  the  mate  lashed  a lantern  to  a long 
pike  pole,  and  as  he  waved  it  to  and  fro  through  the  air,  I 
fired  round  after  round  from  my  Winchester. 

We  waited  there  an  hour  but  there  was  no  response. 
Again  we  signalled,  but  with  the  same  result.  Not  until  the 
moon  rose  at  midnight  did  we  get  clear.  When  we  landed  I 
glimpsed  several  forms  flitting  past  the  window  lights  and 
dissolving  in  the  darkness.  Puzzled,  we  climbed  to  the  cabin 
and  strode  into  a lighted  but  deserted  room.  Nearly  half 
an  hour  we  waited  there,  our  surprise  and  curiosity  mounting 
the  while,  when  at  last  the  familiar,  long,  lanky  form  of  old 
Harold  stood  halting  in  the  doorway.  Recognizing  me  in 
a moment,  his  fear-beclouded  face  became  wreathed  in 
smiles.  He  reached  out  for  my  hand  exclaiming,  “My  God, 
sir,  I t’ote  you  was  the  Germans!”  And  so  it  was  that  we 
first  heard  of  the  great  World  War. 

From  Great  Whale  we  sailed  on  down  through  James  Bay 
and  on  through  ship’s  channel  into  the  nine-mile-wide  delta 
of  the  Moose  to  Moose  Factory;  here  the  Laddie  was  made 
ready  for  the  slipway  where,  through  the  winter,  the  crew 
and  half-breed  shipwrights  of  the  post  were  to  overhaul  her. 
When  everything  was  taken  out  and  her  cobble  ballast 
thrown  overboard,  she  filled  to  the  engine  room  and  would 
have  sunk  had  it  not  been  for  the  shoals  over  which  she  rode. 


VI 


HE  first  map  of  Hudson  Bay,  published  in  the  year 


1612,  was  based  upon  the  notes  of  Hendrik  Hudson, 


which  were  brought  out  in  the  year  161 1 by  the  mu- 


tinous crew  which  cast  him  adrift  to  perish  from  exposure 
and  starvation. 

This  map,  strangely  enough,  shows  three  large  islands 
lying  between  56°  and  60°,  approximately  the  latitude  of 
Wetalltok’s  islands.  The  identity  of  these  islands  was  prob- 
lematical and  provoked  much  discussion.  Burpee,  for  in- 
stance, in  his  chapter  on  the  discovery  of  the  Bay,  speaking 
of  Hudson’s  voyage  and  chart,  says: 

The  chart  shows  several  large  islands  lying  off  the  western  coast  of 
Hudson’s  Bay  between  65°  and  60°.  From  Roe’s  Welcome  in  the  far 
north  to  the  foot  of  James  Bay  only  two  large  islands  lie  off  the  western 
coast,  Marble  Island  and  Akimiski.  The  former  being  out  of  the  ques- 
tion, we  are  reduced  to  Akimiski.  That  convenient  island  seems  to  be  a 
peg  on  which  to  hang  every  theory  of  the  fourth  voyage  that  defies  other 
solution.^ 

Luke  Fox,  in  the  summer  of  1631,  sailed  along  the  eastern 
coast.  In  about  the  latitude  of  the  islands  shown  on  Hud- 
son’s chart,  he  mentions  the  existence  of  certain  islands, 
which  he  says  Hudson  named  “Lancaster,  his  Isles.’’  No 
trace  of  this  name  appears  in  any  of  Hudson’s  notes.  Of 
the  size  and  character  of  the  islands.  Fox  gave  no  information . 

‘L.  J.  Burpee:  “The  Search  for  the  Western  Sea,”  New  York,  1908. 


44 


THE  BELCHER  ISLANDS 


45 


They  remained  a mystery.  And  then  in  1709  they  disappear 
altogether  from  the  charts,  to  be  replaced  by  the  depiction 
of  island  systems  outlying  the  east  coast  given  on  the  Ad- 
miralty charts — groups  of  small  islands  in  dotted  outline, 
the  largest  of  them  not  ten  miles  across.  These  charts 
are  based  on  the  notes  and  maps  of  Captain  Coats,  who  from 
1727  to  1751  sailed  in  and  out  annually  along  the  east  coast 
of  Hudson  Bay. 

Belchers  Islands,  four  in  number,  lie  forty-five  leagues  to  westward  of 
Little  Whale  River;  by  another  account,  only  twenty-nine  leagues  in 
latitude  56°  - 6',  where  I was  entangled  three  days  in  ice. 

About  seven  leagues  north  from  those  is  a range  of  islands  twenty 
leagues  in  length,  fourteen  larger,  and  many  smaller;  the  middle,  in 
58°  00  N.  Latitude,  at  a distance  of  seventeen  leagues  from  the  east 
main,  amongst  which  the  Usquemows  swarm  all  the  summer  months  to 
catch  fish  and  moulted  fowl,  in  great  abundance,  upon  all  these,  Belchers 
and  Sleeper  Islands.^ 

Strangely  enough — when  I last  visited  Great  Whale  River 
Coast  in  the  Laddie — this  was  immediately  following  the 
first  landing  on  the  islands — there  had  been  brought  into 
the  post,  by  one  of  the  traders,  as  a curio  from  a far  outpost 
east  of  Southern  James  Bay,  an  old  copy  of  company  corres- 
pondence— letters  of  Sir  George  Simpson,  Governor  of  the 
Hudson’s  Bay  Company,  and  of  his  factors  on  the  Bay,  dur- 
ing the  years  1846  and  1849.  These  letters  contained,  be- 
sides routine  business  matters,  a project  for  sending  to 
the  Belcher  Islands  a half-breed  servant  of  the  company, 
Thomas  Weigand,  by  name,  with  Eskimo  companions. 


'John  Barrow,  edit.;  “The  Geography  of  Hudson’s  Bay:  Being  the  remarks  of  Captain 
W.  Coats,”  etc.,  Hakluyt  Soc.  Pubis.,  ist  series,  London,  1852,  vol.  II,  p.  66. 


MY  ESKIMO  FRIENDS 


46 

The  letters  relate  how  Welgand  carried  out  this  project. 
They  are,  however,  altogether  concerned  with  starting  a fur 
trade  on  the  Island;  none  of  them  ever  gives  any  evidence  as 
to  either  the  Island’s  character  or  size. 

Extracts  from  a letter  from  John  Spencer,  Fort  George, 
dated  January  8,  1849,  to  Jos.  Gladman,  Esq.: 

. . . At  all  events  he  [Thomas  Weigand]  succeeded  to  accomplish- 

ing his  visit  to  the  Esquimaux  Islands  having  neither  met  with  obstruc- 
tions from  ice  or  shoals  and  when  arrived  there  he  met  with  the  shelter 
and  security  of  an  excellent  harbour,  objects  of  no  trifling  consideration 
to  the  explorers  of  a strange  coast — and  although  it  so  happened  that 
he  saw  but  few  natives  and  got  but  little  from  them  it  would  be  highly 
ridiculous  in  endeavouring  to  make  that  appear  as  a sufficient  reason  for 
not  going  again,  and  that  their  poverty  should  for  a moment  be  thought 
sufficient  for  framing  such  an  idea,  an  idea  in  itself  as  absurd  as  it  is 
ridiculous,  and  could  only  find  shelter  in  a narrow  mind,  for  after  our 
knowledge  of  those  islands,  being  more  or  less  inhabited,  and  that  those 
natives  are  living  under  no  other  protective  hand  than  that  which  na- 
ture bestowed  upon  them,  indifferent  should  we  be  considered  in  our 
endeavour  towards  bettering  mankind,  were  we  to  show  ourselves  in- 
different towards  them.  I think  the  three  first  objects  above  cited  are  a 
sufficient  reason  for  future  enterprise,  even  chilled  as  the  minds  of  the 
crew  were  at  the  solitude  of  the  place  which  in  itself  ought  to  form  but  a 
secondary  consideration  when  exploring  the  regions  of  so  inhospitable  a 
portion  of  the  coast — what  is  it  to  them  whether  the  ground  be  covered 
with  luxuriant  verdure  and  everything  around  cheerful  and  pleasing,  or 
for  them  to  find  it  as  they  did,  provided  they  are  blessed  with  a good  har- 
bour when  arrived  there,  and  by  concerting  measures  hereafter  who 
knows  but  the  inhabitants  of  these  islands  may  be  brought  to 
furnish  a valuable  portion  of  trade  in  Blubber,  Foxes,  Ivory  and  what- 
not— all  such  matters  have  yet  to  be  tried,  and  if  we  cannot  succeed  it 
will  then  be  time  enough  to  relinquish  the  thing.  At  the  present  mo- 
ment I have  no  doubt  but  they  view  the  trip  over  there  with  a degree  of 
unpleasantry  altogether  ideal. 


THE  BELCHER  ISLANDS 


47 

That  this  estimable  scheme  for  mutual  benefit,  however, 
was  not  to  be  realized  is  apparent  from  the  fact  that  the  is- 
lands so  soon  and  so  completely  drop  out  of  Hudson  Bay 
tradition. 

To  the  present  generation  of  fur  traders  on  the  Bay, 
Wetalltok’s  tale  was  a myth,  nor  did  they  believe  my  first 
reports.  Among  some  of  the  government  officials  at 
Ottawa,  as  well,  these  reports  were  nothing  if  not  amusing. 
Where  I claimed  the  existence  of  a great  mass  of  land,  they 
pulled  out  their  Admiralty  chart  and  showed  me  soundings! 


PART  II 


WINTER  ON  WETALLTOK’S  ISLANDS 


WINTER  ON  WETALLTOK’S  ISLANDS 


I 

Yes,”  said  Johnny  Miller,  the  interpreter,  when  I 
landed  at  Charlton  Island,  “Wetalltok  says  he’ll  go. 
He’s  that  glad  to  see  his  own  land  once  more,  sir, 
an’  all  his  friends  an’  relations  what  he  hasn’t  laid  eyes  on 
these  twenty  years.  An’  he  tells  me,  sir,  he’s  real  hungry 
for  walrus  an’  seal  an’  huntin’ — he’s  all  the  time  talkin’ 
about  it.  He  knows  wonderful  places  for  walrus,  sir,  where 
they  almost  cover  the  small  rock  islands,  they  is  so  many. 
An’  he  knows  where  the  bear  country  is,  too,  sir.  He  told 
me  once  how  they  had  to  hang  things  up  on  a string  so 
they  dangled  in  the  wind  an’  made  a noise  in  order  to  keep 
the  bears  from  prowlin’  aroun’  their  camps.  An’  more 
than  the  huntin’,  sir,  he  do  want  to  show  you  how  big  them 
islands  is.” 

By  nightfall,  Wetalltok’s  home  at  Charlton  was  no  more. 
His  wife  and  three  children,  his  two  partners,  their  wives  and 
seven  children  and  twenty  dogs,  kayaks,  sledges,  tents,  and 
hunting  gear  were  aboard  the  Laddie.  Their  impedi- 
menta topped  the  Laddie' s deck  load,  which  was  already  rail 
high,  while  among  the  boxes  and  bales  in  the  choking  hold, 
Wetalltok  and  his  tribe  made  their  temporary  home.  The 
dogs,  chained  in  the  dories  which  swung  from  the  davits  over 
the  rails,  whined  and  yelped  and  chorused  to  the  skies. 

SI 


gCOAY  PDBOC  CiBRARV 


52 


MY  ESKIMO  FRIENDS 


At  nightfall,  the  fifth  day  of  sailing  northward,  we  sighted 
the  southern  outliers  of  Wetalltok’s  islands — little  “hump- 
backs” of  jet  with  rings  of  surf  around  them.  On  long 
lazy  swells  the  Laddie  rolled,  aimlessly,  with  sails  aflap.  The 
night  stole  In.  We  peered  through  the  gloom.  All  we  could 
see  was  white  rings  of  surf  embracing  the  black  shadows  that 
were  Islands.  As  it  was  too  dark  to  put  out  to  sea  again  we 
crept  into  a six-fathom  sounding  and  paid  out  fifty  fathoms 
of  chain  in  the  lee  of  the  nearest  shore.  Though  the  sky, 
when  all  but  the  watch  turned  in  to  sleep,  was  cloudless  and 
crystalled  with  stars,  by  midnight,  the  wind  piped  wild  and 
quick  through  the  rigging.  Clouds  scudded  swiftly  through 
the  sky.  The  Laddie's  stern  tailed  off,  not  a biscuit’s  throw 
from  shore.  The  dogs,  drenched  by  the  seas,  howled  and 
whined,  the  big  round  eyes  of  the  women  and  children  peered 
anxiously  at  us  from  the  hold,  while  with  lanterns  we  hov- 
ered around  the  anchor  chains  speculating  on  how  long  they 
would  hold. 

Daylight  showed  us  an  island,  a lump  of  rock  not  much 
larger  than  the  ship  itself,  all  agleam  from  the  spume  that 
drove  over  it.  Nowhere  was  there  a landing.  The  rack  and 
retching  of  the  chains  as  they  sawed  through  the  steel  eyes  of 
the  Laddie's  nose,  the  slosh  of  the  seas  that  combed  us,  and 
the  boom  of  the  island’s  shore  was  the  dirge  fifteen  hours  long 
before  Bill  bawled  out,  “The  glass  is  climbin’,  sir.”  As 
suddenly  as  It  had  come,  the  gale  died  down. 

Northwestward,  blue  wisps  of  loom  that  seemed  to  float 
on  the  sea  were  our  first  glimpse  of  Wetalltok’s  islands.  We 
rounded,  a few  hours  on,  what  proved  to  be  the  southeastern 
extremity  of  the  island  group.  From  a narrow  winding 


WINTER  ON  WETALLTOK’S  ISLANDS  53 

gutway  we  came  out  upon  a narrow  sound,  landless  on  its 
northern  rim.  The  black  forbidding  shell  of  the  outer 
crest  gave  way  to  cliffs,  ribboned  by  the  yellow-gray  and  terra 
cotta  Nastapoka  rocks.  The  lowlands  were  carpets  of  tawn 
and  russet  moss.  Wetalltok  and  his  throng  had  eyes  for 
nothing  but  the  game — schools  of  white  whales  looping 
through  the  seas;  flock  upon  flock  of  eiders  winging  off  be- 
fore us;  and  geese  skimming  the  profiles  of  slopes  and 
hills,  or  regiments  of  them  high  in  the  air. 

We  found  a site  for  a camp  at  the  head  of  a snug  horse- 
shoe harbour.  A noisy  stream  of  fresh  water  ran  into  it;  the 
head  of  it  was  a beach  of  sand;  fine  landing  for  kayaks  and 
canoes.  The  ground  around  was  for  the  most  part  smooth 
moss  sward. 

We  hardly  had  anchor  down  when  Wetalltok  from  the 
crow’s-nest  called  out,  “Innuet!”  and  pointed  toward  the 
sound.  An  Eskimo  in  a kayak  came  paddling  toward  us. 
Within  hailing  distance  he  halted.  Wetalltok  called  out  in 
Eskimo,  then  rapidly  he  paddled  in.  Open-mouthed,  he 
clambered  up  over  the  rail.  Speechless,  he  stood  on  deck, 
staring  and  smiling  by  turns.  We  had  to  suspend  opera- 
tions whilst  Wetalltok  and  his  throng,  crowding  around  him, 
plied  him  with  such  a rapid-fire  of  questions  that  the  big  mug 
of  tea  we  had  given  him  grew  cold  in  his  hands. 

By  a map  he  showed  us  where  the  main  camps  of  the  is- 
lands lay.  With  him  as  pilot,  Wetalltok,  and  two  of  his 
crew,  I put  off  in  the  launch.  Darkness  had  come  before  we 
chugged  into  the  gloom  of  a harbour  some  twenty  miles  away 
where  on  a cobbled  shore  stood  six  tents  of  Eskimos.  The 
launch  swept  in,  its  rattle  reechoing  among  the  hills.  Ex- 


MY  ESKIMO  FRIENDS 


54 

cited  packs  of  dogs  stood  howling  to  the  skies;  from  the  tents 
not  a soul  came  forth  until  Wetalltok  called;  “Innuet,” 
“Chimo,”  and  an  old  man  haltingly  came  toward  us. 

Wetalltok  explained  to  him  who  and  what  we  were  and  in 
a little  time  a group  of  natives  was  gathered  around  us  shak- 


Showing  Mr.  Flaherty’s  routes  about  the  islands.  The  Belcher  Islands  lie  in  the 
southern  part  of  Hudson  Bay,  just  north  of  James  Bay. 


ing  hands  and  exclaiming  their  surprise.  From  hiding 
places  amongst  the  rocks  the  women  and  children  too  came 
down  to  greet  us.  Over  old  times  and  friends  Wetalltok  and 
the  Eskimos  chattered  the  whole  night  through.  We  struck 


WINTER  ON  WETALLTOK’S  ISLANDS  55 

off  at  daylight  for  the  ship  with  all  the  Eskimos  the  launch 
would  hold.  Clad  in  bearskin,  dogskin,  and  eider  feathers. 


A SEVENTEENTH  CENTURY  MAP  OF  HUDSON  BAY 

Showing,  in  the  oval,  the  large  land  masses  that  apparently  were  intended  to 
represent  the  Belcher  Islands.  Later  the  Belchers  were  shown  on  even  the  best 
maps  in  dotted  outline  as  tiny  groups  of  islands.  It  was  not  until  Mr.  Flaherty 
rediscovered  them  that  they  were  shown  in  their  proper  position  and  proportions. 


they  were  as  primitive  looking  a lot  as  I have  ever  seen. 
Said  Salty  Bill,  regarding  their  wide-eyed  and  gaping  masks 


MY  ESKIMO  FRIENDS 


56 

as  we  swung  in  alongside:  “Well,  sir,  some  queer  fish  comes 
in  with  the  tide.” 

Within  a week,  kayaks  catamaraned,  the  rifle-cracking 
launch  and  dories  had  ferried  the  Laddie  s cargo  to  shore  to 
where  streams  of  old  men,  women,  and  children  carried  it  to 
the  building  huts,  speculating  the  while  as  to  what  each 
box  and  bale  and  bundle  contained.  For  hours  at  a time 
they  watched  the  crew  build  the  kablunak’s  big  igloo. 
Prizes  to  them  were  waste  bits  of  board  and  bent  nails. 

Until  the  sea  ice  formed  there  was  a succession  of  bleak, 
melancholy  days  with  gales  of  driving  sleet  and  rain.  We 
were  taken  up  with  work  around  the  base  getting  our  gear 
and  equipment  in  shape,  making  sledges  and  bartering  for 
dogs  for  the  winter  sledging.  We  made  inland  journeys  over 
the  island  upon  which  we  lived,  and  cruises  along  its  coast- 
line, in  the  hope  of  locating  sufficient  driftwood  for  our 
winter’s  fuel.  We  had  counted  on  getting  driftwood  but 
nowhere  could  we  find  a supply  to  serve  two  huts  the  winter 
through,  so  on  the  last  open  water  of  the  year,  we  took  the 
Laddie  across  to  the  Great  Whale  Coast  on  the  mainland  and 
returned  with  wood,  laden  to  the  rails.  Of  coal,  we  had  some 
four  tons,  all  that  was  obtainable  at  Moose  Factory,  and 
this,  with  the  Laddie's  cargo,  I hoped  would  be  enough. 

With  each  new  face  that  came  drifting  in,  Wetalltok  and 
I pored  over  maps  and  listened  to  what  he  had  to  say  about 
the  islands,  and  about  his  own  hunting  grounds  in  particular. 
By  the  number  of  sleeps  it  took  to  travel,  we  could  approxi- 
mate the  distance  to  the  point  whence  he  had  come.  The 
magnitude  of  the  country  grew  with  each  new  tale. 

With  pieces  of  iron  ore,  Wetalltok  explained  to  the 


WINTER  ON  WETALLTOK’S  ISLANDS  57 

Eskimos  that  it  was  these  rocks  we  came  to  seek.  He  told 
them  how  the  white  man  “boils”  these  rocks  and  fashions 
the  wonderful  knives  and  guns  and  spear-heads  which  they 
hold  so  dear.  He  told  them  how  they  could  tell  if  the  blue 
rocks  were  iron  ore  by  scratching  them  with  flint,  for  the 
scratches  made  red  streaks  like  blood.  Several  among  them 
knew,  they  thought,  where  were  the  sevick  (iron)  rocks  and 
promised  to  bring  in  pieces  when  they  came  again,  which 
would  be  over  the  sea  ice  in  winter. 


II 


December  came  in  with  calm,  clear,  frosty  skies, 
raked  at  night  by  glorious  auroras  and  lighted  by 
day  with  floods  of  sunshine.  The  tiniest  lakes 
were  soon  closed  with  emerald  seals,  then  the  larger  in  quick 
succession.  The  white  rims  of  the  harbour  crept  farther  and 
farther  out  from  shore,  and  along  the  sweeping  arc  of  the 
sound  itself  a jagged  ice  edge  sparkled  in  the  sun.  Within 
two  weeks  the  Laddie  had  ceased  swinging  from  her  chains 
and  the  seal  of  winter  was  everywhere. 

When  Christmas  came  we  kept  open  house  for  Wetalltok 
and  his  throng  and  all  the  islanders  who  were  camped  near 
by.  Salty  Bill  improvised  a tree.  Spruce  boughs,  which 
he  had  brought  up  from  Moose  for  the  purpose  of  making 
spruce  beer,  he  lashed  to  a pole.  The  candles  were  foot- 
long  miners’  dips,  and  the  decorations  were  brightly  labelled 
fruit  cans  from  the  cook’s  scrap  pile.  The  presents  were 
black  plug  tobacco  and  matches  for  the  men  and  needles 
and  combs  and  trade  candy  for  the  women  and  their  flocks. 
While  Bill  acted  Santa  Claus,  Wetalltok’s  gramophone 
belched  forth  its  rasping  sounds.  The  lilt  of  “Tipperary” 
and  of  Harry  Lauder’s  songs  was  contagious,  but  the 
“ Preacher  and  the  Bear,”  with  its  monologue  and  the  realistic 
growling  from  a supposed  bear,  was  a knock-out. 

“Nanook!  Nanook!”  (the  bear!  the  bear!)  they  ex- 

58 


r 

1 

1 


I 

1 


! 


■’  M'ft  ■ 


1 


iV 


V/ 


I 


I 


I 


I 

f 


1 


I ' 


L 


[ 


@ REVTLLOK  FRERES.N.Y.  ROBERT  J FLA.HERTY,  F.  R- □ - S 


TOOKTOO 

(The  Dee  n ) 

Chief  of  Sikoslingmuit  Eskimos 
Southern  Baffin  Land 


WINTER  ON  WETALLTOK’S  ISLANDS  59 

claimed,  rocking  with  laughter,  but  the  kiddies,  half  fright- 
ened, clung  to  their  mothers  and  rolled  their  almond  eyes. 

When  the  ceremonies  around  the  tree  were  over.  Bill 
herded  the  teddy-bear  youngsters  around  the  stove  and 
popped  corn,  the  most  surprising  thing  by  way  of  food  they 
had  ever  seen,  “Cakeot  nucky”  (the  gun  food)  they  called 
it,  as  enraptured,  they  watched  the  kernels  popping  in  the 
air. 

We  had,  however,  to  bring  to  an  end  the  celebrations 
within  the  overcrowded  house,  for  our  nostrils  could  not  be- 
come attuned  to  the  seal  odour  of  their  society.  We  wound 
up  the  day  by  playing  at  nothing  less  than  a game  of  baseball 
on  the  harbour  ice.  It  was  coated  with  just  enough  snow 
to  make  good  ground.  The  Laddie  s starboard  side  we  used 
as  a back-stop.  The  bleachers  were  the  Laddie's  deck,  bul- 
warks, and  rigging.  If,  what  with  our  cumbersome  fur 
costumes,  the  game  lacked  speed,  it  did  not  lack  interest  for 
the  gallery — old  men,  women,  young  and  old,  and  squalling 
youngsters — especially  if  one  of  their  kind  was  fortunate 
enough  to  hit  the  ball,  for,  as  they  saw  it,  the  pitcher’s  role 
was  to  hit  the  batter!  Only  darkness  stopped  us. 

It  was  the  second  of  January  before  the  first  sledges  of 
Eskimos  came  in  from  out  of  the  mysterious  west;  strangers, 
they  proved  to  be,  who  had  not  heard  of  our  advent  on  the 
islands.  When  we  had  pulled  their  dogs  and  ours  from  a big 
rolling  ball  of  fight,  Wetalltok  led  them  indoors,  ensconced 
them  on  the  floor,  and  thrust  sea  biscuits  and  big  mugs  of 
scalding  tea  into  their  ready  hands.  It  was  a long  time  be- 
fore we  could  question  them,  so  lost  were  they  in  wonder  of 
the  kablunak’s  igloo,  but  finally  we  did  extract  the  informa- 


6o 


MY  ESKIMO  FRIENDS 


tion  we  had  long  been  waiting  for,  that  everywhere  to  west- 
ward the  sea  ice  was  fit  for  travel. 

At  noon  with  a thirteen-dog  team,  Wetalltok,  two  of  the 
crew,  and  I,  struck  out  for  the  west.  The  visitors  with  their 
dogs  and  sleds  accompanied  us  to  a point  less  than  a sleep 
away  where  was,  they  thought,  an  outcrop  of  sevick  rocks, 
enough  to  load  the  kablunak’s  ship  many,  many  times. 
They  knew  that  it  must  be  a sevick  rock,  for  like  the  flesh 
it  showed  red  when  they  scratched  it. 

Winter  bared  its  teeth  as  we  filed  over  the  ice.  Wind 
swooped  down  in  gales;  it  scoured  the  fields  and  hills  and 
sent  clouds  of  snow  smoke  whirling  through  the  air.  Within 
the  day  we  reached  the  point  where  the  sevick  lay.  And 
sevick  it  proved  to  be — not  only  in  loose  pieces  wherever 
were  wind-swept  patches  of  bare  ground,  but  in  a vein,  from 
twenty-five  to  thirty  feet  wide,  running  north  and  south 
along  the  coast.  Though  the  coast  was  veiled  in  drift,  and 
the  vein  outcropped  intermittently,  we  traced  it  southward 
for  thirty  miles,  so  vividly  did  the  big  red  band  of  it  stand 
out  through  the  black  and  white  desolation.  I was  to  find 
out  before  the  year  was  through  that  it  was  the  richest  and 
largest  occurrence  to  be  found  on  all  the  islands. 

There  was  no  end  to  the  gales  and  drifting  snow.  We 
continued  northwestward  over  lakes  and  ponds  and  difficult 
boulder-stream  ground  into  the  interior.  En  route,  we 
hit  the  ice  of  the  northern  half  of  Wetalltok’s  great  lake, 
which  he  had  told  me  was  so  large  that  from  the  south  end 
looking  north  there  was  no  land,  just  water,  like  the  sea. 
But  as  we  travelled  to  its  head  we  could  see  nothing,  for  the 
drift  was  blinding. 


WINTER  ON  WETALLTOK^S  ISLANDS  6i 


A half  sleep  from  Wetalltok’s  lake  we  struck  the  sea. 
Drift  again  filled  the  air.  The  dogs  wailed  now  and  then; 
some  of  them  vomited  from  the  cold.  Suddenly  they  gave 
tongue.  Before  I knew  what  had  happened,  Wetalltok  was 
at  their  head,  rifle-cracking  his  long  lash.  Beyond  him, 
crouching  over  his  snowblind,  arms  folded  on  knees  and  har- 
poon in  lap,  sat  an  Eskimo.  Through  a breathing  hole  no 
larger  than  the  butt  end  of  his  harpoon  he  was  watching  for 
seal  to  rise.  Since  dawn,  Wetalltok  said,  he  had  been  wait- 
ing there.  As  quietly  as  may  be  we  detoured  and  in  a mo- 
ment the  drift  had  swallowed  him. 

By  nightfall  we  picked  up  the  orange  square  of  an  igloo’s 
lighted  window.  It  was  the  igloo  of  one  Rainbow.  Not  a 
seal  had  he  killed  for  eight  days,  said  he.  All  that  he  had 
to  live  on  was  sea  pigeons,  from  an  open  tidal  pool  near  by. 
Just  before  we  arrived  he  had  killed  one — the  first  in  two  days 
— and  his  wife,  who  was  plucking  it,  held  it  up  for  me  to  see. 
Though  they  knew  that  I had  little  or  nothing  in  the  way  of 
food  to  give  away,  their  own  troubles  were  forgotten  in  the 
concern  for  the  visitor  who  had  come  among  them.  While 
Rainbow  helped  Wetalltok  with  the  dogs  out-of-doors,  the 
good  wife  hustled  here  and  there  putting  to  rights  her  igloo’s 
disarray.  She  sent  her  daughters  scurrying  out-of-doors 
for  a pail  of  clean  tea-water  snow,  while  she  unrolled  my 
sleeping  bag,  pulled  off  my  kooletah,  and  laid  it  over  her 
feebly  burning  lamp  so  that  it  would  be  warm  by  morning. 
Nor  did  she  allow  her  children,  while  we  ate  our  beans  and 
bacon,  to  hover  around,  for  fear  it  would  prove  embar- 
rassing. When  they  saw  me  crawl  in  to  sleep,  they  spoke  in 
whispers.  I dozed  off  to  the  hiss  of  driving  snow  and  the 


62  MY  ESKIMO  FRIENDS 

low  sounds  of  their  speculations  as  to  when  the  seals  would 
come. 

I told  Rainbow,  as  we  made  ready  to  leave,  to  come  into 
the  base  when  I got  back,  and  I would  try  to  be  hospitable 
and  kind,  and,  “Yes,”  added  Wetalltok,  “be  sure  you  keep 
one  eye  open  for  the  sevick  rocks  as  you  come.”  Rainbow 
said  he  would — that  is,  if  he  ever  killed  another  seal;  and 
there  was  a chorus  of  laughter. 

For  hours  two  sundogs,  slashed  by  rainbows  which  rose 
straight  up  from  the  sea,  flanked  the  sun.  The  snow  smoke 
was  like  lace  drawn  by  some  giant  hand  over  the  black  knobs 
of  hills  and  the  folds  and  wrinkles  of  the  satin  plains.  But 
the  glory  of  the  day  was  short.  By  three  o’clock  the  sun 
was  smothered  by  the  snow.  When  I mentioned  igloo, 
Wetalltok  said,  “Ouki,”  and  pointed  with  his  whip  stock  to 
a snow  slope  far  ahead.  As  my  eyes  followed  his  direction, 
I saw,  nested  together  like  so  many  hives,  a village  of  snow 
houses. 

In  the  first  igloo  into  which  I crawled  was  the  wreck  of  an 
old  man;  his  kindly  face,  seamed  and  weather-scarred,  had 
two  shining  dots  for  eyes.  “There  is  no  more  hunting  for 
me,”  he  lamented,  and  pointed  to  his  legs  which  were  bent 
and  twisted  by  some  disease.  His  daughter,  no  more  than  a 
girl,  followed  us  in.  Abashed  by  our  gaze  she  furiously 
shook  the  snow  powder  from  her  furs.  “She  does  the  hunt- 
ing for  this  old  man,”  Wetalltok  explained.  “Every  day 
with  the  old  man  of  the  igloo  adjoining  she  goes  on  the 
ice  after  seals.  Every  night  for  ten  days  she  says  they  have 
been  coming  home  with  sledges  empty — they  have  not  even 
seal  oil  for  their  lamps.  A salmon,  now  and  then,  which  the 


WINTER  ON  WETALLTOK’S  ISLANDS  63 

old  women  catch  in  the  ponds  near  by,  is  all  the  food  they 
have.”  But  they  all  forgot  their  troubles  in  their  delight  at 
seeing  us.  Wetalltok  and  they,  with  one  of  my  flickering 
candles  and  the  kablunak’s  good  tea  twice  boiled  between 
them,  yarned  half  the  night  through. 

For  two  days  we  crawled  over  the  mouths  of  deep  bays 
and  in-draughts  of  the  island’s  south  coast.  Valueless  days 
for  reconnaissance,  however,  for  impenetrable  drift  still  drove 
through  the  air. 

The  glimpse  of  showers  of  sparks  which  a chimney  vomited 
to  the  gale  told  us  that  at  last  we  were  home.  In  a moment 
more  I was  standing  before  the  crackling  stove,  rubbing 
cheeks,  ears,  and  nose,  which  felt  as  if  they  were  made  of 
parchment  and  burning  warm. 

Until  midnight,  to  the  tune  of  the  drift  lashing  the  cabin 
walls  and  the  wailing  of  the  wind  among  the  eaves,  we  talked. 
“ ’Tis  the  land  of  the  gales,  sir,”  said  Salty  Bill.  “In  the  last 
nine  days  you  has  been  gone  but  one  day  come  clear.  In 
the  cracker  last  night,  rifle  shots  woke  me.  ’Twas  the  big 
provision  tent  strippin’  to  pieces.  An’  these  winds  makes  it 
hard  for  the  huskies,  sir.  Every  time  there  is  a knockin’  on 
the  door  I knows  that  one  of  them  is  on  the  other  side  an’ 
with  ‘kopunga’  (hungry),  on  his  lips.  They  says  there  is 
no  seals,  save  out  in  the  rough  ice,  an’  they’re  not  venturin’ 
there  now  for  fear  of  bein’  swept  to  sea.  ’Tis  the  rare  salmon 
or  two  what  pulls  them  through,  sir,  an’  what  little  grub  I 
has  been  givin’  ’em. 

“But  we’ve  got  to  close  down  on  dolin’  out  more  grub, 
for  ’tis  meltin’  away.  I have  to  ration  Wetalltok’s  family 
in  the  hut  now,  for  the  huskies  has  been  hangin’  around  an’ 


MY  ESKIMO  FRIENDS 


64 

of  course,  sir,  husky  fashion,  they  just  had  to  share  with  them 
until  themselves  went  hungry.” 

Wetalltok  looked  worried  when  he  came  in  the  next  morn- 
ing. He  gave  me  to  understand  that  he  was  not  going  to 
keep  on  living  off  my  dwindling  supply  of  food,  but  was  going 
to  take  his  family  and  go  afield  with  the  others.  When  I 
told  him  that  he  couldn’t  be  spared,  he  begged  for  one  of  the 
teams  and  rations  for  ten  days.  He  left  the  following  morn- 
ing, saying  he  was  not  coming  back  without  seal. 


Ill 


The  gales  and  cold  kept  on;  the  last  of  the  big  mili- 
tary tents  housing  our  food  and  gear  was  stripped 
into  ribbons.  One  black  night  we  were  awakened  by 
the  pandemonium  of  fighting  dogs.  Tookalook’s  old  master 
dog  was  chewing  at  a big  sealed  tin  of  bully  beef,  tearing 
it  open,  strips  of  tin  jammed  between  his  bleeding  fangs. 
Old  boots,  whips,  or  harness,  and  even  a pup  (Tookalook  lost 
three  in  as  many  days)  were  delicacies  for  them  these  times. 

On  the  twelfth  day  was  ended  the  biggest  drifter  of  the 
year.  The  cabin  was  snowed  up  to  the  roof — the  dogs 
scampered  over  it.  Wetalltok’s  hut  was  completely  buried; 
a shaft  straight  down  through  the  snow  marked  its  entrance. 
The  forlorn  Laddie  was  drifted  bulwarks  high. 

“We  may  get  good  weather  now,”  was  old  Tookalook’s 
observation  as  he  scanned  the  brick-red  sunset  and  pointed 
to  the  stars  outcropping  above  it  in  the  steely  sky.  “ Wetall- 
tok,  I think,  will  now  get  his  chance  for  seals.”  Bill  and  I 
were  long  since  busy  with  supper-making  when  old  Tooka- 
look popped  his  head  in  through  the  door  and  asked  me  for 
my  “big  eye”  (telescope),  saying  that  Wetalltok’s  wife  from 
the  lookout  hill  saw  the  black  specks  of  a team  coming  in  to- 
ward us.  Tookalook  wondered  if  by  some  rare  fortune  it 
could  be  Wetalltok. 

It  was  not  long  before  the  din  of  knocking  brought  us  out- 
of-doors  to  where  on  the  lookout  every  man,  woman,  and 

6s 


66 


MY  ESKIMO  FRIENDS 


child  stood  watching  intently  the  slowly  moving  black  forms 
of  an  approaching  team.  Wetalltok  it  was,  they  thought, 
but  as  to  whether  he  was  coming  loaded  or  empty,  they  could 
not  yet  tell.  The  gloom  thickened  and  the  sledge  crawled 
like  a snail.  I went  indoors  for  a moment  for  the  ship’s  big 
glass,  when  suddenly  the  wild  exclamation  “Netsuk!”  re- 
sounded through  the  air. 

“Wetalltok  it  is,  sir,”  said  Bill,  “an’  what’s  more  he’s 
bringin’  home  the  seals.” 

“How  many?”  I asked  as  Wetalltok  waded  through  the 
crowd  toward  us. 

“Timietow,”  said  he,  holding  up  ten  fingers. 

The  babel  of  some  forty  dogs  shattered  the  peace  and 
quiet  of  the  first  calm  night  in  many  days.  Around  Wetall- 
tok, his  young  son,  and  Tookalook,  the  dogs,  just  out  of 
reach  of  Wetalltok’s  cracking  whip,  circled  belly-down,  like 
the  wolves  they  were.  Their  eyes,  reflecting  the  lantern 
light,  shone  like  bolts  of  fire.  Their  muzzles  were  white 
with  froth  of  hunger.  Constantly,  Wetalltok  kept  cracking 
his  whip  around  their  circle,  a dread  lash  with  which  he  could 
split  an  ear  or  cut  clear  through  their  tough  hides.  But  one 
or  another  would  attempt  a desperate  sally  for  the  seal  meat 
which  old  Tookalook  was  portioning.  They  were  too  intent 
to  fight  save  when  some  poor  devil  was  caught  by  Wetalltok’s 
lash.  The  pain  of  it  would  send  him  bounding  straight  in  the 
air,  or  maddened  beyond  all  control  he  would  bury  his  fangs 
in  the  unfortunate  nearest  him.  When  Bill  and  I turned 
toward  camp  the  dogs  were  sleeping  and  Wetalltok  and  his 
tribe  had  crawled  into  the  feast  of  the  warmth-giving  seal 
for  which  they  had  waited  so  long. 


t 


■y 


2: 


I 

w 

CO 

o 

o 


5f. 


WINTER  ON  WETALLTOK’S  ISLANDS  67 

There  were  no  hungry  hordes  of  hangers-on  about  the  hut 
from  this  time  on,  for  everywhere,  Wetalltok  said,  the  big  ice 
had  been  broken  by  the  gale,  and  seal  meat  was  in  plenty 
in  the  encampments  of  the  islanders. 

By  the  middle  of  March  the  days  grew  long  and  warm. 
Cottony  clouds  sailed  through  a sky  resplendently  blue. 
There  were  glorious  days  of  sledging.  We  made  in  one  day 
distances  that  had  required  three. 

Toward  the  end  of  May,  Wetalltok  and  I,  storm-bound 
on  a rocky  point  some  thirty  miles  from  camp,  were  awak- 
ened one  wild  night  by  the  boom  and  grind  and  milling  of  the 
big  ice  tumbling  before  a southeast  gale.  When  daylight 
came  the  threads  of  the  outer  coast  were  broken  by  gigantic 
rafts  of  ice.  Beyond  them  stood  smoking  sea.  There  had 
been  sleet  and  snow  and  rain  for  two  days  past,  and  the 
snow-covered  ice  that  lay  between  us  and  the  camp  was  like 
a sponge  charged  with  water.  Here  and  there  were  pools 
so  deep  that  the  dogs  swam,  the  sledge  floated,  and  we,  fol- 
lowing after,  waded  through  depths  above  the  knee.  By 
dark,  camp  was  reached.  We  soaked  in  its  good  red  heat. 

For  a fortnight  Bill  had  been  over-hauling  the  little 
Nastapoka — the  self-same  craft,  the  reader  will  remember, 
with  which  I made  the  first  attempt  to  reach  Wetalltok’s 
islands.  Upon  her  I depended  for  the  summer  cruises 
around  the  island  and  for  the  last  trip  down  the  bay  toward 
the  railway  frontier.  For  the  Laddie^  since  only  Bill  re- 
mained of  her  crew  (the  others  had  been  sent  across  to  the 
mainland),  had  been  abandoned.  In  fact,  her  bulwarks, 
yards,  masts,  and  arms  had  been  broken  up  two  months 
before  to  supply  the  deficiency  in  our  fuel. 


68 


MY  ESKIMO  FRIENDS 


June  came  in  with  days  long  and  gloriously  warm.  House- 
flies buzzed  over  the  sunlit  panes  of  our  windows.  Bumble- 
bees hovered  among  the  mosses.  Young  would-be  hunters 
with  miniature  bows  and  arrows  stalked  for  yellowlegs,  and 
aimed  mockingly  at  the  flocks  of  geese  that  came  sailing 
overhead.  Wetalltok,  old  Tookalook,  and  their  families 
squatted  by  their  kayak  frames,  put  on  fresh  sealskin  covers, 
while  Bill  worked  upon  the  Nastapoka^  which  stood  by. 

Hunting-gear  and  summer  clothes  had  long  since  been 
made.  The  Nastapoka  stood  ready  to  slide  into  the  sea. 
On  the  memorable  seventeenth  of  June  we  were  awakened  by 
a strangely  familiar  sound.  It  was  the  wash  of  surf. 


IV 


IS  a wind-ridden  land,  sir,  and  no  mistake,”  said 


Salty,  as  we  crawled  into  our  diminutive  cabin  for 


an  hour’s  sleep.  The  Nastapoka  rolled  and  heaved 
at  the  end  of  her  chains.  For  three  days  the  drive  of  sleet 
and  rain  resounded  like  blasts  of  sand  on  our  cabin  roof  and 
walls.  The  only  breaks  in  its  monotony  were  wild  squalls, 
strong  enough,  though  we  rode  under  bare  poles,  to  heel  us 


over, 


“Yes,  sir,”  said  Bill,  continuing,  “now  I minds  how  we 
looked  forward  to  the  breaking  up,  and  how  when  it  came 
our  uncivil  times  would  be  over,  sir.  But  here  we  are,  sir, 
ten  days  from  camp  and  the  log  on  the  lean  side  of  fifty 
miles.”  After  a rumble  of  oaths  that  would  have  made  a 
bloody  pirate  feel  at  home.  Bill  dozed  off  to  sleep. 

We  bowled  out  the  next  morning,  and  over  big  wallops  of 
seas,  sailing  close-hauled  along  the  main  south  coast  into  the 
west.  We  crossed  the  mouths  of  bays  and  in-draughts  so 
deep  that  their  inland  shores  were  thin  lines,  gray-blue.  As 
in  winter,  we  only  bee-lined  from  point  to  point  as  the 
weather  willed,  cruising,  however,  strips  of  coast  which  the 
sledge  trip  had  not  touched. 

At  the  last  north  camp  of  islanders,  first  among  the 
swarms  of  kayakers  who  scooted  out  to  where  we  were  slip- 
ping anchor  in  the  harbour  was  old  Mukpollo,  his  Billiken 
mask  smiling  welcome.  “Walrus  there  are,”  said  he,  after 


70 


MY  ESKIMO  FRIENDS 


we  had  “chimoed,”  shaken  hands,  and  given  him  some  black 
plug  tobacco  for  a pipe  that,  upside  down,  poked  out  from  his 
lips.  “My  own  eyes  have  seen  them,”  said  he,  “a  whole  is- 
land of  them.  And  my ! ” — as  his  eyes  swept  the  Nastapokd s 
decks — “but  you  have  the  fine  omiak  for  getting  them.” 

But  “How  far  is  it?”  was  our  first  question. 

“Oh,  not  far,”  said  he,  and  he  pointed  northeastward  over 
open  sea.  His  idea  of  “not  far,”  it  turned  out,  was  a long 
day’s  kayaking;  but  the  picture  he  painted,  as  only  an 
Eskimo  can  where  game  is  involved,  decided  us.  Mukpollo 
came  aboard  at  dawn — every  man  of  the  encampment  clam- 
oured to  come,  too — and  with  his  kayak  slung  up  on  deck 
we  sailed  away. 

At  sundown  we  picked  up  the  half-round  rock  of  a small 
island  which  the  log  said  stood  forty  miles  at  sea.  A rookery 
it  proved  to  be,  as  we  crawled  close  in;  over  it  like  pin-points 
in  the  sky,  as  black  and  thick  as  flies,  swarms  of  sea  pigeons 
rose  in  panic.  We  were  looking  for  a landing  amongst  the 
windings  of  its  cobbled  shores  when  suddenly  we  sagged  in 
the  trough  of  a big  ground  swell;  the  Nastapoka  struck,  and 
the  sea  that  followed  swung  us  in  upon  a nest  of  reefs.  Bill 
jumped  into  the  surf  with  a line  around  his  middle,  and  half 
swam,  half  tumbled  to  land.  Scrambling  up  to  a huge 
boulder  he  wrapped  around  the  line.  But  in  less  time  than 
it  takes  to  tell,  the  Nastapoka^  her  bottom  broken,  was  slosh- 
ing full,  and  everything  that  was  floatable  rose  out  of  the 
hatchways  and  drifted  in  to  shore. 

Gloomily  enough  we  surveyed  the  hulk — which,  half  sub- 
merged, rocked  to  and  fro  in  the  lazy  ground  swell — and  the 
wreckage  that  we  had  laid  out  before  us  on  the  rocks; 


WINTER  ON  WETALLTOK’S  ISLANDS 


71 


blankets  outspread  to  dry,  a side  of  bacon,  sugar  now  turning 
to  syrup,  and  a dripping  bag  of  tea.  We  made  a roaring 
driftwood  fire  and  while  we  stood  around  it  waiting  for  the 
steaming  clothes  we  wore  to  dry,  we  munched  sodden  sea 
biscuit  and  gulped  scalding  tea  and  discussed  pro  and  con 
just  what  was  best  to  do. 

Our  only  means  of  transport,  I pointed  out,  were  the  kayak 
and  our  canoe.  “And  yes,”  said  Bill,  “some  sixty  miles  of 
sea  to  use  them  in.”  But  Mukpollo  said  there  were  four 
small  islands,  albeit  they  were  surf-bound,  strung  along  the 
way  to  the  nearest  point  of  the  main  coast.  He  mapped 
them  in  the  sand,  and  then,  leading  up  to  the  island’s  crest, 
pointed  to  the  gray  dot  of  the  first  of  them  which  appeared 
to  be  about  fifteen  miles  away. 

“Well,  sir,”  said  Bill,  turning  from  one  of  the  gloomy  sur- 
veys of  the  Nastapoka  s corpse  swinging  among  the  rocks, 
“ if  I could  find  me  a decent  size  o’  driftwood,  sir,  I wants  one 
try  at  salvagin’  before  we  leaves.”  And  though  he  led  a 
hope  forlorn  I gave  in. 

He  and  Mukpollo  came  back  within  an  hour  carrying  on 
their  shoulders  a log  of  driftwood  that  for  these  latitudes  was 
surprisingly  large.  “’Tis  a lucky  find,  sir,”  said  Bill  as  he 
threw  it  down.  “There’s  ne’er  one  more  like  it  on  the  is- 
land,” and  I caught  a gleam  of  hope  in  his  eye.  He  un- 
folded his  plan.  “The  log  is  what  we  calls  the  Spanish 
winch,  sir,”  said  he,  “and  when  I makes  it  we’ll  have  the 
Nastapoka^  if  the  weather  holds,  up  on  dry  land.” 

“But  look  here.  Bill,”  said  I,  “there  are  holes  in  the 
Nastapoka  that  you  or  I could  crawl  in.” 

“ I minds  that,  sir,  but  with  canvas  patches  we’ll  tar  them 


72  MY  ESKIMO  FRIENDS 

and  patch  her  over,  and  I think,  sir,  they’ll  see  us  to  the 
camp.” 

Willingly  enough  we  started  in.  Bill  first  ran  a line  from 
the  Nastapoka  in  two  hundred  feet  on  shore  to  a narrow  crack 
in  a ledge  of  rock.  In  the  crack  he  inserted  the  flukes  of  two 
anchors.  In  the  round  of  the  anchor  flukes  he  shoved  the 
driftwood  log  which,  after  infinite  pains,  Mukpollo  and  he 
with  hunting  knives  had  made  fairly  smooth.  Around  the 
log  he  took  two  turns  of  the  line  which  led  to  xht  Nastapoka  s 
nose,  and  with  chains  we  took  half  turns  in  the  ends  of  the 
winching  log  and,  inserting  stakes,  began  winding. 

Hour  after  hour  the  winding  kept  on,  to  the  tune  of  Bill’s 
creaking  Spanish  winch,  the  slosh  of  surf  flowing  in  and  out 
the  Nastapoka' s wounds,  and  Bill’s  ‘‘She  comes,  me  byes, 
she  comes.”  There  were  aching  backs  and  blistered  hands 
for  every  foot  we  gained.  On  the  morning  of  the  third  day 
Bill  pointed  to  lowering  clouds  banked  out  in  the  west. 
‘‘If  there  is  a cracker  in  them,”  said  he,  “there’ll  be  nothing 
left  us  but  the  Nastapoka' s bones.”  But  the  “cracker” 
kept  away,  and  inch  by  inch  the  Nastapoka  came.  By  night- 
fall she  was  safe. 

Bill’s  plan,  however,  of  patching  her  temporarily  with 
tarred  canvas  was  not  so  successful.  In  one  place  her  plank- 
ing for  four  feet  in  length  and  one  and  a half  feet  in  width, 
and  the  ribs  that  supported  them,  were  gone.  So  three  of 
us,  at  dawn  of  the  first  calm  day,  struck  out  in  the  canoe  for 
camp,  a hop-skip-and-jump,  as  it  were,  between  the  surf- 
bound  islands  that  intervened.  Within  seven  days  we 
were  back  again  with  extra  oakum,  tar,  and  tools,  and  six 
lengths  of  precious  board,  which,  since  every  scrap  of  wood 


WINTER  ON  WETALLTOK’S  ISLANDS  73 

about  the  camp  had  long  ago  been  used  up  for  fuel,  we  had 
to  rip  from  the  walls  themselves.  In  three  weeks  the  Nasta- 
poka  again  was  launched,  but  a more  patched  and  bandaged 
craft  never  rode  the  seas.  With  relays  of  the  crew  bailing 
the  while.  Bill  finally  shoved  her  battered  nose  into  the  mill 
pond  of  camp  harbour. 

By  the  first  of  August  our  iron  ore  expeditions  were,  as  far 
as  circumstances  would  permit,  complete.  We  had  found, 
all  told,  five  ranges  lying  east  and  west  from  one  another,  an 
average  of  six  miles  apart,  and  extending  north  and  south  a 
distance  of  thirty  miles.  The  extent  of  iron-ore-bearing 
rocks  actually  outcropping  was  more  than  one  hundred 
square  miles. 

Two  of  my  crew  had  left  by  sledge  in  early  January  for  the 
mainland,  to  proceed  thence  southward  along  the  coast  and 
overland  to  the  line,  taking  with  them  plans  of  deposits,  and, 
for  analysis,  samples  of  the  ore.  They  were  to  return  with 
a party  of  Sir  William’s  engineers  who  were  to  report  upon 
the  commerciability  of  what  we  had  found. 

After  weeks  of  waiting,  shouts  of  “Omiak!  Omiak!”  rang 
through  the  air,  and  a York  boat  wing-and-wing  came  bowl- 
ing up  the  Sound.  The  engineers  en  route  since  the  first  of 
June  were  my  own  father,  who,  wearing  a two-months- 
old-growth  of  beard,  I hardly  recognized;  Doctor  Moore, 
geologist,  and  W.  H.  Howard,  surveyor,  who  besides  claim- 
surveying was  to  make  astronomical  observations  for  the 
still  skeptical  government  at  Ottawa.  I shall  never  forget 
my  difficulties  that  memorable  day  trying  to  play  host  and 
read  the  while  the  long  year’s  mail. 

Within  a fortnight  the  ore  examinations  were  complete. 


MY  ESKIMO  FRIENDS 


74 

and  the  visitors  sailed  out  for  Great  Whale  River  on  the 
mainland,  at  which  point  they  were  to  reach  the  fur  ship 
when  it  called  in  southward  bound.  At  Moose  Factory, 
they  were  to  await  the  coming  of  Bill  and  myself  on  the 
Nastapokuy  then  by  canoe  we  would  all  journey  together  up 
river  to  the  rail  frontier. 

Since  the  Nastapoka  could  carry  only  our  food,  instru- 
ments, and  personal  gear,  I divided  the  hut  and  its  furnish- 
ings among  Wetalltok,  Tookalook,  Mukpollo,  and  their 
families.  There  was  everything — dishes,  an  old  mirror,  old 
magazines,  powder,  caps,  and  cartridges,  knives,  axes,  old 
clothing,  cloth,  and  old  shoes.  As  a special  payment  the 
gramophone  and  records  went  to  Calla,  our  cook;  a rifle  to 
Mukpollo;  the  canoe  to  Tookalook,  and  to  Wetalltok  our 
poor  old  pianola,  much  scarred  and  stained  and  out  of  tune 
from  rough  transport  and  misuse.  But  to  Wetalltok  it  was 
the  most  wonderful  thing  in  all  the  world — “big  box  with 
the  many  insides!” 

On  the  thirteenth  of  September,  with  the  Nastapoka  deep 
laden  with  our  personal  gear,  films,  instruments,  and  food 
— Bill  and  I said  our  last  good-byes  . . . regretfully 

enough  pulled  up  anchor,  the  crowd  on  shore  gloomily  watch- 
ing us,  and  sailed  out  through  the  harbour  past  the  old 
Laddie  s stranded  hulk,  and  on  into  the  Sound.  Wetalltok, 
old  Tookalook,  and  Mukpollo  followed  us  for  a while,  waving 
as  they  ran  along  the  shore. 

I received  some  letters  a year  later  from  Great  Whale 
River,  dated  three  months  before,  and  in  them  was  news  of 
Wetalltok’s  islands.  Rainbow  had  gone  mad,  the  result  of 


© REVILLDN  TRERES.N.Y.  R O B E RT  J . F L AH  CRT  Y.  F.  R . G .S. 


ALLEGOO 

.•i  (Shining  Water) 

'i.  S/ZcosZ/n^mu/l:  Eskimo  Woman 

? Southern  BafFfn  Land 


WINTER  ON  WETALLTOK’S  ISLANDS  75 

starvation.  For  many  days  he  had  been  at  large  with  the 
Winchester  and  cartridges  that  I had  given  him,  spreading 
terror  among  the  islanders.  To  save  themselves  they  had 
had  to  kill  him. 

Poor  old  Tookalook,  in  less  than  a month  of  my  departure 
had  dared  the  crossing  to  the  Great  Whale  Coast  in  the  canoe 
I had  given  him,  and  his  kayak,  catamaraned.  Big  winds 
had  caught  him.  The  canoe  had  been  found,  bottom  up,  on 
the  mainland  shore. 

A letter  from  good  old  Mavor,  the  factor  at  Great  Whale, 
read: 

Perhaps  you  will  remember  having  given  your  pianola  to  Wetalltok 
just  before  you  left  the  Belcher  Islands  last  fall.  Well,  Wetalltok  was 
stuck  with  that  pianola  on  his  hands;  he  couldn’t  take  it  into  his  igloo, 
and  he  couldn’t  live  in  your  cabin  for  he  had,  of  course,  no  fuel.  So  he 
conceived  the  idea  of  sledging  that  pianola  over  to  me — it  seemed  that 
you  told  him  I would  be  keen  to  buy  it — but  how  he  could  transport  a 
full-size  pianola  over  eighty-five  miles  of  sea  ice,  and  some  of  it  rafted 
mighty  high  at  that,  was  more  than  I could  see,  but  he  did  it — brought  it 
right  into  Great  Whale  Post,  only  to  find  that  I wasn’t  there,  for  I had 
been  transferred  in  the  fall,  south  to  Fort  George  (i86  miles  away). 
So  he  kept  on  down  the  coast  having  obtained  supplies  from  the  factor 
on  the  strength  of  the  sale  of  the  pianola  to  me,  and  after  the  Lord  knows 
how  many  days,  he  came  sledging  in  one  day  at  nightfall,  right  into  my 
post  yard,  with  a “Chimo”  and  a “Here,  Angarooka,  is  the  box  with 
the  many  insides.”  The  thing  worked,  you’ll  be  surprised  to  hear, 
though  some  of  its  notes  were  what  Wetalltok  called  “sick  sounds”! 

BIBLIOGRAPHY 

Flaherty,  R.  J.:  “The  Belcher  Islands  of  Hudson  Bay:  Their  Dis- 
covery and  Exploration,”  Geog,  Review,  vol.  V,  no.  66,  pp.  433-58,  1918. 

Moore,  E.  S.,  “The  Iron  Formation  on  the  Belcher  Islands,  Hudson 


MY  ESKIMO  FRIENDS 


76 

Bay,  with  Special  Reference  to  its  Origin  and  its  Associated  Algal  Lime- 
stone,” "Jour,  of  GeoL,  vol.  XXVI,  pp.  412—38,  1918. 

“Iron  Formation  on  Belcher  Islands,  Hudson  Bay,”  with  Special 
Reference  to  its  Origin  and  its  Associated  Algal  Limestone,”  Bull,  of  the 
Geol.  Soc.  of  Am..,  vol.  XXIX,  p.  90  (abstract  only),  1918. 

“Iron  Deposits  on  the  Belcher  Islands,  Hudson  Bay,”  Monthly  Bull, 
of  the  Can.  Min.  Inst.,  no.  82,  Feb.,  1919,  pp.  196-206,  1919. 

“Ore  Deposits  of  Arctic  Canada,”  Eng.  and  Min.  four.,  vol.  CX,  pp. 
306-400,  1920. 

Woodbridge,  D.  E.,  “Iron-Ore  Deposits  on  Belcher  Islands,”  Eng. 
and  Min.  four.,  vol.  CXII,  pp.  251-54,  1921. 

“Iron-Bearing  Rock  of  Belcher  Islands,  Hudson  Bay,”  by  G.  A. 
Young,  Canadian  Geol.  Survey,  1922. 


PART  III 


EXPLORATION  OF  NORTHERN  UNGAVA 


EXPLORATION  OF  NORTHERN  UNGAVA 


I 

This  narrative  begins  at  Great  Whale  River  on  that 
memorable  night  in  March,  1912,  when,  as  the  reader 
may  remember,  one  Pitchalock  came  to  old  Harold’s 
hut  with  the  news  that  the  icefields  over  which  for  months 
I had  been  planning  to  cross  to  Wetalltok’s  islands  had  been 
broken  by  the  gales.  The  failure  to  get  to  Wetalltok’s  is- 
lands in  the  diminutive  Nastapoka^  the  five  months’  long 
wait  for  the  sea  ice  to  form,  and  then  this  freak  break-up  of 
the  ice,  knocked  all  my  plans  to  pieces.  There  was  left  me 
out  of  the  wreckage,  however,  one  plan  that  I had  long  hoped 
to  carry  through.  This  was  an  exploration  of  the  interior 
of  northern  Ungava.^ 

This  interior  was  the  largest  unexplored  area  remaining  on 
the  mainland  of  northern  Canada.  The  map  of  it  was  a 
blank.  Low  speaks  of  it  as  follows: 

There  still  remains  about  120,000  square  miles  of  the  northern  portion 
of  the  peninsula  between  Hudson  and  Ungava  bays,  totally  unknown  to 
any  one  except  the  wandering  bands  of  Eskimos  who  occasionally  pene- 
trate inland  from  the  coast.^ 

'Robert  J.  Flaherty:  “Two  Traverses  Across  Ungava  Peninsula,  Labrador,”  Geo- 
graphical Review,  vol.  VI,  no.  2,  August,  1918  (American  Geographical  Society,  New  York). 

'“Previous  explorations  of  the  Labrador  Peninsula  lay  to  southward  through  the  Indian 
country.  The  northernmost  started  from  Richmond  Gulf,  and  following  the  Clearwater, 
the  Larch  and  the  Koksoak  Rivers,  was  first  taken  by  Doctor  Mendry  in  1824  for  the 
Hudson’s  Bay  Company.  Doctor  Mendry’s  expedition  is  the  basis  for  Ballantyne’s 
famous  boys’  story,  “Ungava.”  Low  made  the  same  crossing  in  1896  and  mapped  and 
geologically  explored  the  country. 


79 


8o 


MY  ESKIMO  FRIENDS 


At  only  one  point  had  the  interior  been  penetrated.  This 
was  when  Low  himself,  sledging  in  some  forty-five  miles 
from  the  coast  of  Hudson  Bay,  discovered  and  explored  the 
course  of  Kasiagaluk,  the  Great  Seal  Lake  of  the  Eskimos, 
until  the  starving  condition  of  his  dogs  forced  him  to  retreat. 
Of  Kasiagaluk,  which  he  called  Lake  Minto,  Low  speaks 
as  follows: 

Kasiagaluk  or  Lake  Minto  is  one  of  the  largest  lakes  of  the  Labrador 
Peninsula,  being  according  to  the  Eskimos,  upwards  of  one  hundred 
miles  longd 

With  the  exception  of  Low’s  fragmentary  map  of  Kasiaga- 
luk and  his  route  thither,  all  other  details  of  lakes  and  streams, 
as  shown  on  all  the  maps,  were  merely  copies  of  maps  made 
by  the  Eskimos.  What  Low  had  seen  was  merely  the  be- 
ginning. How  big  was  Kasiagaluk — how  big  its  discharge, 
the  mysterious  river  which  wound  down  the  peninsula’s  far 
slope  to  Ungava  Bay.^  And  all  this  was  but  one  thread  of 
a maze  of  waterways  hidden  in  the  silences  of  what  seemed 
to  me  then  illimitable  barrens  of  the  great  peninsula! 

Besides,  there  was  the  west  coast  of  Ungava  Bay  to  ex- 
plore for  iron  ore.  Along  this  coast,  much  of  it  shown  on 
the  maps  as  nothing  but  a dotted  line,  I might  intersect  an 
extension  of  the  inaccessible  iron  ore  series  long  since  known 
to  exist  along  the  lower  reaches  of  the  Koksoak,  some  two 
hundred  miles  southward.  Indeed,  to  find  an  iron  ore  series 
similar  to  those  on  the  Nastapokas  and  such  as  I hoped  to 
find  on  the  Belcher  Islands,  was  the  object  of  the  undertaking. 


*See  A.  P.  Low:  “Report  on  Explorations  in  the  Labrador  Peninsula  along  the  East 
Main,  Koksoak,  Hamilton,  Manicuagan  and  Portions  of  Other  Rivers  in  1892—93-94- 
95,”  Report  L of  Annual  Kept.  Geol.  Survey  oj  Canada,  vol.  VIII  for  1895,  Ottawa,  1896. 


EXPLORATION  OF  NORTHERN  UNGAVA  8i 


With  old  Harold  and  Nero  I discussed  ways  and  means. 
The  distance  from  Great  Whale  north  a hundred  and  fifty 
miles  to  White  Whale  Point,  thence  inland  across  the  great 
interior  to  what  Nero  called  the  eastern  sea  (Ungava  Bay) 
was  roughly,  as  we  should  wind,  seven  hundred  miles — not  a 
great  distance,  as  Nero  pointed  out,  for  sea  coast  travel;  but 
inland  where  “him,  no  seal,  no  tooktoo,  no  nothing,”  a more 
difficult  matter.  “Since  I am  small  boy,”  Nero  went  on, 
“deer,  him  all  same  gone.”  Meaning  that  the  vast  herds 
of  countless  thousands  that  once  wandered  through  the 
illimitable  barrens  were  now  no  more.  “Dogs,  him 
starve,”  said  Nero,  referring  to  his  journey  with  Low,  inland 
to  the  great  lake,  Kasegaleek,  and  eastward  along  its  coast, 
until  the  starving  condition  of  the  dogs  forced  them  to  re- 
treat to  the  sea. 

For  food  we  must  depend  entirely  upon  the  supply  we 
could  carry  on  our  sledges.  Nero  would  be  unable  to  go 
with  me  all  the  way.  His  wife  refused,  in  the  face  of  the 
utmost  of  the  fur  trade  blandishment  and  all  that  I could 
offer,  to  let  him  be  gone  on  so  long  a journey.  .We  did, 
however,  arrange  that  he  should  accompany  us  as  far  inland 
as  he  had  travelled.  This  point,  the  one  he  had  made  with 
Low,  we  estimated  to  be  one  fourth  of  the  total  journey  from 
sea  to  sea.  When  we  reached  this  point  I would  cull  the  best 
dogs  from  both  teams,  and  take  on  the  additional  supplies 
from  Nero’s  sledge,  leaving  enough  to  see  Nero  back  to  the 
coast. 

Harold’s  negotiations  for  two  men  were  protracted.  One, 
Omarolluk,  who,  though  a newcomer  at  Great  Whale,  had 
already  won  for  himself  a reputation  as  a hunter  and  a 


82 


MY  ESKIMO  FRIENDS 


sledging  man,  was,  Harold  considered,  the  man  most  desir- 
able for  the  trip.  His  wife,  too,  kept  him  for  several  days  in 
a state  of  indecision.  Harold  finally  won  her  over  by  assur- 
ing her  that  she  and  hers  would  live  on  rations  at  the  post 
during  Omarolluk’s  absence,  and  to  clinch  the  bargain  gave 
her  a silk  bandanna,  some  beads,  and  sweeties  for  her  young- 
sters. To  Omarolluk,  however,  the  angarooka’s  food  and 
the  princely  wage,  eighty-five  beavers  a month  (almost 
three  times  the  post  wage) — inducements  such  as  I should 
have  relied  upon — were  of  small  moment.  But  Harold’s 
picture  of  the  big  deer-killing  in  spring  where  the  great  deer 
migrations  ford  the  Koksoak  River  inland  from  Ungava 
Bay,  which  he,  Omarolluk,  would  take  part  in,  provided 
that  we  accomplished  the  journey,  proved  to  be  the  winning 
card. 

Omarolluk  secured,  Harold  swung  into  line  for  him  a sledg- 
ing partner,  Wetunik  by  name,  whose  principal  stock  in 
trade  I later  found  was  his  smiling  disposition  and  his 
penchant  for  the  angarooka’s  good  nucky. 

Finally  our  food  supply  was  checked  and  overhauled. 
This  was  done  on  the  trade-shop  floor  for  the  benefit  of 
Omarolluk  and  Wetunik,  who  by  dint  of  hefting — weights 
and  measures  being  of  course  unknown  to  them — were 
finally  made  satisfied,  jubilant  in  fact,  over  what  they 
felt  sure  was  a good  and  sufficient  outfit. 

At  break  of  day  we  started.  Harold  ran  up  the  ffag. 
Omarolluk’s  long  whip  cracked  through  the  air.  The  howl- 
ing din  of  the  dogs  stopped  suddenly.  They  lunged  ahead. 
The  sledges  rocked  like  ships  at  sea  behind  the  multitude  of 
their  galloping  heels.  The  waving  throngs,  the  drift-swept 


NASCAUPIE  INDIAN  CHIEF 

N orthern  Labrador 


(5)  REVTUL.DN’  FRSRESfNVr 


EXPLORATION  OF  NORTHERN  UNGAVA  83 

cabins,  the  flag,  ironed  out  against  the  stark  steel  sky,  soon 
dropped  behind  the  shoulder  of  an  intervening  hill. 

Our  journey  along  the  coast  was  familiar  ground.  Here 
and  there  we  encamped  with  old  friends,  deeply  interested, 
all  of  them,  in  the  prospects  of  our  long  journey.  The 
kindly  souls  gave  us  their  best  advice  of  the  country  inland 
as  far  as  they  in  the  old  deer-hunting  days  had  wandered. 
All  was  easy  travelling  until  we  came  to  the  rough  ice  off  Gulf 
Hazard.  Here  Nero’s  sledge  from  a pressure  ridge  some 
twenty  feet  high  pitched  over  a sheer  wall  of  ice.  One  of  its 
two-inch  plank  runners  was  broken  clean  across  the  grain. 
We  retreated  a dozen  miles  to  the  encampment  of  one  Jim 
Crow.  With  him  we  bartered  for  a new  sledge.  Much 
scurrying  on  the  part  of  Nero  from  the  sledge  owner’s  camp 
to  mine  and  back  again,  more  times  than  I have  the  patience 
to  tell.  “Jim  Crow,  him  say  yes,  all  right,  your  paper  [order] 
to  Koksoak  angarooka.  Tobaccomik,  sweetieloo,  him 
plenty;  only  now  him  want  matches  and  maybe  bead  his 
baby.”  And  so  it  went  on,  until  finally  Nero’s  blandly  smil- 
ing mask,  poking  itself  through  my  camp  door,  announced 
that  “Jim  Crow,  him  full.”  The  order  that  my  numb 
fingers  made  out  on  Great  Whale  Post  resembled  somewhat 
the  inventory  of  a Woolworth  store. 

Nero  was  made  much  of  by  his  admiring  fellows,  not  only 
as  my  valet  de  chambre  (God  save  the  mark!)  but  did  he  not 
know  all  the  intricacies  of  the  white  man’s  tongue  so  that  he 
could  satisfy  them  upon  all  the  points  upon  which  they 
were  curious — my  safety  razor,  my  gun,  my  kit  of  medicines 
which  Nero  warned  them  were  not  meant  for  food,  and  the 
thermometer?  I kept  night  and  morning  records.  As  I 


84 


MY  ESKIMO  FRIENDS 


crawled  out  at  nightfall  and  hung  the  thermometer  upon  the 
point  of  a harpoon  sticking  in  the  snow,  a throng  gathered 
around  me.  Nero  was  called  upon  to  explain.  When  he 
had  concluded  he  translated  for  my  benefit.  “I 
tell  ’em,”  said  he,  “when  white  string  [the  mercury]  go  up 
over  hole  [zero  on  the  scale]  everything  all  same  water,  but 
him  go  down  under  hole,  she’s  all  ice.”  Omarolluk,  how- 
ever, looked  doubtful.  He  kept  looking  at  the  tiny  ther- 
mometer swaying  in  the  wind,  and  then  out  upon  the  miles 
of  frozen  sea.  For  the  life  of  me  I could  not  understand  why 
he  was  so  puzzled.  Said  Nero  by  way  of  explanation: 
“Omarolluk  say,  your  little  thing  can’t  do,  only  cold  make 
all  that  ice.” 

We  were  not  long  out  from  Jim  Crow’s  camp  when  we 
again  entered  rough  ice  at  Gulf  Hazard.  On  all  the  thousand 
miles  of  coast  of  Hudson  Bay  there  is  no  ice  so  dangerous, 
for  here,  through  a mere  slot  through  huge  lumps  of  hills, 
discharge  the  waters  of  Richmond  Gulf,  in  a long,  writhing 
tongue  that  cleaves  its  way  over  two  miles  straight  out  to  sea. 
We  were  forced  to  detour  eight  miles  from  land,  and  even 
here  Nero,  testing  the  ice  with  his  harpoon,  drove  it  through. 
“Him  Adelite  [Indian]  name,  ‘qua  qua  chickawan,’” said 
Nero.  “She  mean,”  he  explained,  “‘him  swallow  quick.’” 

The  next  day,  though  it  was  distant  thirty  miles,  we 
picked  up  the  smoke  of  Nastapoka  Falls  twisting  in  the 
sky — the  landmark  we  had  long  been  looking  for.  From  it 
we  were  to  strike  inland  across  the  big  interior.  In  the 
seven  days  we  had  been  journeying  along  the  coast,  not  a 
seal  had  been  killed.  All  we  had  in  the  way  of  fresh  meat 
was  some  fifty  pounds  of  blubber  for  the  dogs’  diet  of  corn- 


EXPLORATION  OF  NORTHERN  UNGAVA  85 

meal.  And  now,  Nero  reminded  us,  we  were  leaving  the 
sea  and  the  life-sustaining  seal  it  held.  He  wondered  if  it 
were  not  better  to  camp  until  a seal  kill  had  been  made  and 
feed  up  our  not  over-thriving  dogs  for  the  big  trip  ahead;  but 
this  might  mean  several  days’  delay.  Anyway,  concluded 
Nero,  if  the  dogs  did  not  pick  up  we  might  camp  on  one  of 
the  lakes  of  the  interior  and  cut  down  through  the  ice  on  a 
chance  for  fish.  Marked  by  a monument  of  cobblestones, 
we  left  a cache  of  rations  sufficient  to  help  Nero  on  his  return, 
and  ourselves  as  well,  if  by  any  chance  we  had  to  retreat. 

With  Nero’s  team  in  the  lead,  we  swung  up  the  long  steep 
slopes  of  the  coastal  range,  whose  seared  and  wrinkled  crest 
loomed  above  us  in  the  eastern  sky.  We  climbed  into  stiff 
winds  as  that  memorable  day  wore  on.  Whirlpools  and 
eddies  of  snow  came  racing  around  and  through  us  as  they 
birled  toward  the  big  wide  void  of  sea.  The  western  sky 
was  red  before  we  reached  a respite  from  the  climb,  a plateau 
that  led  us  over  a miniature  cobbled  plain  to  a deep  gulf 
among  the  hills.  With  a last  long  look  over  the  sea  below, 
and  with  a “Good-bye  seals!’’  from  Nero,  we  were  soon 
buried  in  the  ranges. 

During  the  next  four  days  we  covered  less  than  thirty 
miles,  for  we  were  lost  most  of  the  time,  so  confusing  were  the 
slots  and  grooves  of  valleys  through  which  we  travelled. 
Nero  would  have  to  climb  to  lookouts  and  signal  to  us,  the 
handful  of  dots  strung  out  in  some  pocket  far  below  him, 
the  course  to  follow.  We  often  toiled  only  to  find  our  valley 
a blind,  at  its  end  a sheer  wall  facing  us.  And  then  to  work 
out  of  it  meant  both  teams  and  ourselves  harnessed  to  a 
single  sledge. 


86 


MY  ESKIMO  FRIENDS 


Along  the  coast  driftwood  had  been  our  fuel.  Now  all  we 
could  depend  upon  was  an  occasional  stunted  tree  that  grew 
in  some  deeper  wind-sheltered  pocket  of  the  hills.  As  we 
worked  into  the  ranges  even  these  disappeared.  All  that 
was  left  us  were  the  creeping  willows  and  trailing  spruces 
that,  with  snowshoes  as  shovels,  and  on  hands  and  knees,  we 
burrowed  for. 

But  the  fifth  day  the  hills  around  us  changed  to  long,  curv- 
ing slopes,  with  shallow  saucers  of  valleys  between  them. 
The  valleys,  moreover,  inclined  toward  the  east,  which  meant 
(said  Nero)  that  we  had  reached  the  point  where  the  water 
“him  go  Ungava  Bay.” 

Toward  nightfall  we  reached  the  crest  of  the  last  big  hill. 
To  eastward,  far  below  us,  lay  miles  and  miles  of  snow- 
smoking plain,  the  chaotic  face  of  it  sprinkled  with  multi- 
tudes of  boulders  which  stood  out  of  the  satiny  waste  like 
pin  points  of  jet.  The  blur  of  horizon  was  broken  here  and 
there  by  solitary  hills.  While  we  gazed  and  debated  upon 
what  valley  to  descend,  the  snow  smoke  settled  down  and 
the  middle  distance  resolved  itself  into  paralleling  threads 
that  wound  and  twisted  around  a sweep  of  ice  whose  far 
horizon  was  a landless  rim — the  ice,  said  Nero,  of  Kasegaleek, 
the  great  seal  lake  of  the  Eskimos. 

For  four  days  we  continued  eastward  over  the  ice  of 
Kasegaleek.  The  only  break  in  the  monotony  of  low,  bar- 
ren granite  shores  was  the  skeleton  of  a tepee  frame — a gaunt 
silhouette  against  the  sky — an  old  camp  of  Indians  who  used 
to  come  here  in  the  few  short  weeks  of  summer  from  their 
own  hunting  grounds  within  the  limit  of  trees,  far  southward. 
At  another  place  Nero  pointed  out  the  spot  where,  when  he 


EXPLORATION  OF  NORTHERN  UNGAVA  87 

was  a boy,  his  father  had  made  a deer  kill — so  many,  said 
he,  that  it  had  taken  three  days  to  cut  them  up.  Here  as 
everywhere  through  the  great  interior,  Nero  continued, 
the  Eskimos  used  to  come  in  from  the  coast  in  the  early 
spring,  on  the  watch  for  migrations  as  they  worked  north 
from  the  Indian’s  land  of  trees.  Sometimes  there  were  so 
many  that  if  one  put  his  ear  to  the  ground  he  could  hear 
them.  “Him  sound  like  thunder,  very;  but  now,”  la- 
mented Nero,  “deer,  him  gone.  Huskie — him  starve.” 

He  spoke  of  three  families  who,  several  winters  before,  had 
struck  out  from  the  Koksoak  across  the  interior  for  Hudson 
Bay — “Nobody  see  ’um  no  more.” 

Over  the  winding  arms  and  bays  of  Kasegaleek,  on  the 
evening  of  the  fourth  day  we  came  to  the  point  which  Nero 
said  marked  the  lake’s  halfway.  This  was,  as  we  had 
arranged,.the  place  where  Nero  and  his  team  would  turn  back, 
being  the  extreme  point  to  which  we  could  economically 
continue  with  both  teams.  We  took  stock  of  our  supplies  and 
dogs.  As  to  the  supplies  we  had  no  concern,  but  the  teams 
were  failing.  They  must  get  red  meat.  Nero  proposed  that 
Omarolluk  and  he  take  three  days  off,  deer-hunting  in  the 
hills  inland,  while  Wetunik  cut  down  in  the  ice  for  fish.  But 
three  days  of  hunting  and  four  holes  through  seven  feet  of  ice 
failed  to  yield  us  the  meat  of  which  the  dogs  stood  so  much 
in  need. 

Notwithstanding  the  situation,  Omarolluk  and  Wetunik 
were  willing  enough  to  continue.  Omarolluk  argued  that, 
though  the  team  were  lean  and  impoverished,  the  last  three 
days  of  inaction  had  rested  them;  moreover,  the  worst  of  the 
going — the  coastal  ranges — was  over,  and  from  now  on. 


88 


MY  ESKIMO  FRIENDS 


through  Kasegaleek  and  down  the  unknown  river  to  the 
sea,  would  be  the  easiest  going  of  the  journey.  Not  only 
that,  but  there  would  be  always  the  chance  for  fish  wherever 
a rapid  might  be  open;  then  surely  somewhere  along  its  long 
winding  course  we  must  come  across  the  trail  of  some  little 
band  of  deer.  Of  the  twenty-three  dogs  available  Omarolluk 
culled  thirteen  and  took  all  the  food  supply  from  Nero’s 
sledge,  save  enough  to  enable  Nero  to  return  to  Great  Whale. 
Through  the  early  hours  of  our  last  night  together  we  sewed 
boots  and  broken  gear  and  mended  harness,  with  specula- 
tions now  and  then  as  to  the  character  of  the  country  that 
lay  ahead.  With  Nero’s  help  I retouched  my  vocabulary, 
for  the  extent  of  my  Eskimo  was  such  as  “ Make  the  fire,” 
“Which  way  is  the  wind?”  and  those  most-used  phrases  of 
all,  “I  am  hungry”  and  “Is  it  far?” 

At  daylight  Nero  struck  out  for  distant  Great  Whale  and 
Omarolluk,  Wetunik  and  I for  Ungava  Bay.  We  had  a cold, 
hard  day’s  work  of  it;  then,  at  camping  time,  that  which  we 
had  taken  for  the  lake’s  main  body  we  found  to  be  nothing 
but  a long  bay,  and  the  head  of  it  a .barrier  of  steep  granite 
hills.  Through  all  the  following  day,  as  drifting  and  as  cold, 
we  retraced  our  steps,  camping  at  nightfall  on  the  spot 
where  we  had  taken  leave  of  Nero  two  days  before. 

For  three  days  we  continued  northeast  over  Kasegaleek, 
across  the  mouths  of  multitudes  of  mysterious  bays  that  led 
God  knows  where,  through  flocks  of  rocks  of  islands,  over 
long  traverses  and  through  narrows  in  steep  granite  hills. 
And  everywhere  the  rims  of  frozen  lake  and  the  profiles  of 
the  ranges  were  blurred  by  the  smoking  snow.  We  lost 
hours,  huddled  for  shelter  within  the  sledge-load’s  lee,  wait- 


EXPLORATION  OF  NORTHERN  UNGAVA  89 

ing  while  Omarolluk  scouted  among  the  hills.  The  sleeping 
dogs  were  often  drifted  over  before  he  signalled  his  three 
shots  for  us  to  come  on. 

On  the  evening  of  the  fourth  day,  rime,  spiralling  in  the 
acid  air,  and  the  vivid  green  of  an  open  rapid,  marked 
Kasegaleek’s  end  and  the  beginning  of  an  unknown  river’s 
long  career  to  sea.  “Here  is  the  place  for  fish,”  thought  I,  as 
we  drew  up  alongside,  “with  nothing  like  the  cutting  of 
seven-foot  holes  through  Kasegaleek’s  thick  hide  to  stand  in 
the  way.”  Omarolluk  thought  so  too;  so  we  camped  near  by. 

A day  we  spent  trolling  and  watching,  spears  in  hand,  but 
not  a sign  of  fish  did  we  see.  There  were  constant  reminders 
of  the  hunger  of  the  team.  They  fought  like  demons  over 
their  corn  meal  and  tallow.  With  whips  and  snowshoes  and 
clubs  we  kept  them  from  annihilating  one  poor  brute  that 
for  two  days  past  had  been  slowly  breaking.  Omarolluk 
shook  his  head  as  he  swept  a hand  across  its  ribs. 

For  three  days  we  slowly  followed  the  loops  and  turns  of 
the  river.  There  was  but  one  interest,  a covey  of  ptarmigan, 
the  first  life  we  had  seen  all  the  way  in  from  Hudson  Bay. 
We  came  upon  them  so  suddenly  that  there  was  no  time  to 
use  a gun.  Whip  in  hand,  Omarolluk  crept  toward  them. 
The  whip  trailed  out  behind  him.  Foot  by  foot  he  ap- 
proached. The  covey  broke.  Forward  like  a shot  the 
long  six-fathom  lash  flashed  through  the  air.  The  covey 
flew  up  and  sailed  over  the  shoulder  of  a hill — but  where 
Omarolluk’s  lash  had  flattened  out  lay  a ptarmigan,  dead 
upon  the  snow. 

The  trough-like  valley  of  the  ^•iver  deepened  as  we  went 
on,  with  big  flanks  of  granite  hills  rising  steeply  at  either 


90 


MY  ESKIMO  FRIENDS 


hand.  The  stunted  trees  that  wound  in  a straggling  line 
along  their  forefeet  emphasized  the  chaotic  desolation  that 
loomed  above  them.  Now  and  then  the  bluster  of  March 
winds  blocked  out  the  hills  and  the  view  ahead,  and 
forced  us  to  fall,  groping,  close  in  to  shore.  There  were  bad 
breaks,  too,  in  the  slow-going  underfoot,  giving  way  at  one 
never-to-be-forgotten  point  to  a frozen  rapid  nine  miles  long. 
Sheer  walls  on  either  hand  forced  us  into  troughs,  deep  pits 
and  gouges.  The  rough-and-tumble  played  out  the  dogs. 
When  Omarolluk  and  Wetunik  returned  from  a fruitless  day’s 
search  for  deer,  hardly  one  of  them  had  energy  enough  left 
to  break  out  from  its  blanket  of  drifted  snow.  Their  day 
and  night’s  rest  did  them  little  good,  for  when  we  started  on 
the  journey  once  more  we  could  hardly  urge  them  on.  The 
leader,  at  one  time  the  jauntiest  dog  we  had,  finally  lay  down 
and  refused  to  rise,  but  whined  and  licked  her  aching  paws 
when  we  drew  near.  Omarolluk  unharnessed  her,  and  she 
rode  lashed  aboard  the  sledge. 

Constantly  our  eyes  roved  for  signs  of  game,  scanning  the 
nooks  and  crannies  of  the  drift-swept  hills  and  the  grooves  of 
valleys  that  among  them  wound  down  to  the  river’s  shore, 
and  among  the  straggling  clumps  of  spectral  trees;  but  on 
all  that  hopelessness  of  white  and  gray  all  that  lived  and 
breathed  and  moved  were  our  own  black  dots,  bending 
slowly  over  the  loops  and  curves  of  that  endless  stream. 

The  day  deepened  to  a gloom  of  gray.  The  drift  thickened 
before  a rising  wind.  Omarolluk  halted  the  team.  Stand- 
ing up  on  the  sledge  load  he  scanned  the  shoreline  for  signs 
of  camping  ground.  Suddenly  he  jumped  down.  On  his 
hands  and  knees  he  began  brushing  away  the  newly  drifted 


- 'mm-^ 


hBp-  )f^  ._ , • ' 


yssmtr 


<■ 


f?* 


.jf-  o<- 


j^‘ 


''^v  i,  ' -«>“™" 
I^  «e» 2EW^_ 


ESKIMO  HUNTING  SCENES 

As  sketched  by  Wetailtok.  The  upper  two  sketches  show  two  hunters  and  their  dogs 
approaching  seals  on  the  ice.  The  next  lower  drawings  show  hunters  creeping  up  on 
caribou.  The  lower  sketch  shows  the  end  of  a successful  seal  hunt. 


EXPLORATION  OF  NORTHERN  UNGAVA  91 

snow.  He  beckoned  me  near.  “Fresh  deer  tracks!”  cried 
he,  “and  not  far  from  here.”  By  pantomime  he  made  me 
understand  that  they  were  sure  to  be  yarded  in  some  deep 
valley  among  the  hills.  Telling  Wetunik  and  me  to  keep 
on  to  the  first  good  camping  ground,  he  unlashed  his  rifle  and 
struck  out  westward  across  the  river.  In  a moment  he  was 
swallowed  by  the  drift,  bent  on  what  seemed  to  me  a hope 
forlorn.  Wetunik  and  I camped  a mile  onward  within  the 
meagre  shelter  of  some  stumps  of  trees.  The  dogs  fed  their 
lean  ration,  and  our  meal  of  beans  and  bacon  and  tea  cooked 
and  eaten,  we  waited  through  the  long  hours  of  the  night,  to 
the  tune  of  the  soughing  wind  among  the  trees  and  the  com- 
plaining whines  of  the  hungry  team. 

Sometime  in  the  monotony  of  it  all  we  fell  asleep.  The 
dogs,  frantic  with  excitement,  wakened  us.  The  while  we 
rubbed  our  eyes  came  the  crunching  of  Omarolluk’s  steps.  I 
reached  out  for  the  stove — for  that  Omarolluk  was  cold  and 
hungry  was  all  that  entered  my  mind — when  the  door  opened 
and  he  crawled  in.  His  face  was  wreathed  in  smiles. 

“Took too,”  said  he,  and  advanced  his  three  fingers  before 
our  incredulous  eyes.  Whilst  we  plied  him  with  beans  and 
sea-biscuit  and  scalding  tea,  he  pantomimed  his  story  with 
all  the  details  of  the  hunt.  None  of  us  had  any  thought  of 
sleep.  As  soon  as  the  team  could  be  harnessed  he  and 
Wetunik  struck  out  to  bring  in  the  kill.  It  was  long  after 
daylight  before  they  came  back;  and  though  one  of  the  team 
had  been  killed  by  his  fellows  at  the  feast,  two  happier  and 
more  contented  mortals  than  Wetunik  and  Omarolluk  were 
never  seen.  All  through  the  day  and  night  that  followed 
they  gorged  and  slept,  and  gorged  again. 


II 


WITH  a spanking  team  before  us,  lunging  and  eager 
to  get  on,  we  made  miles  in  one  day  that  had 
taken  two  before.  There  were  flocks  of  ptarmigan 
here  and  there  among  the  stunted  willows  along  the  banks. 
At  one  lunch  ground  a whisky-jack  hopped  around  us  while 
we  dined,  begging  for  all  the  bacon  rinds  and  biscuit  crumbs 
we  could  spare. 

Each  new  bend  of  the  river  led  off  to  wider  and  longer 
sweeps,  and  the  ranges  grew  in  grandeur  at  either  hand. 
At  one  point  we  came  to  the  mouth  of  a large  tributary 
stream — an  artery  leading  through  what  labryinths  of  rivers, 
lakes,  and  streams  into  regions  mysteriously  far,  even  the 
oldest  of  the  present  generation  of  Eskimos  do  not  know. 

As  the  sun  gained  in  strength  the  snow  became  scintillat- 
ing like  the  dust  of  powdered  diamonds.  It  raised  havoc 
with  our  eyes,  in  spite  of  goggles.  For  two  days  Wetunik’s 
eyes  were  altogether  blind.  All  of  one  day  he  rode  full  length 
on  the  sledge,  shielding  them  with  folded  arms. 

We  had  hardly  settled  into  our  stride  for  the  journey  one 
bright  blue  morning,  when  Omarolluk  halted  the  team  and 
pointed  to  a terrace  of  marine  gravel  plastered  like  a railway 
grading,  high  up  among  the  hills.  “We  are  near  the 
sea,”  said  he.  With  every  mile  the  river  valley  widened 
and  the  hills  became  still  more  bold.  Reaches  of  river 
opened  up,  beyond  which  we  could  see  the  blue  haze  of  far- 


92 


EXPLORATION  OF  NORTHERN  UNGAVA  93 

off  shores.  The  days  were  glorious — blue  skies  and  wads  of 
cotton  for  clouds,  and  what  wind  there  was,  warm  and  soft, 
carried  spring  in  its  arms.  On  the  tenth  of  April  we  came 
face  to  face  with  a gigantic  pile  of  rafted  ice.  “Tiahoke — - 
the  sea!”  exclaimed  the  men.  The  ice,  however,  seemed  im- 
passable, but  so  were  the  beetling  shores  which  hemmed  us 
in.  For  three  days  we  climbed  and  tumbled  and  chopped 
and  wriggled  our  way  through  it.  We  fed  the  dogs  on 
frozen  beans  and  sacrificed  our  grub  boxes  for  fuel  enough  to 
boil  tea.  As  the  tides  buoyed  it  up  and  down,  the  groaning 
and  rifle-cracking  of  the  ice  upon  which  we  slept  resounded 
the  long  nights  through. 

When  morning  came,  we  climbed  the  highest  ice  on  the 
lookout  for  a course  beyond  the  welter  of  stuff  that  lay 
ahead.  What  we  saw  was  open  water  in  the  distance,  and 
floes  packing  with  the  wind.  Up  and  over  the  shoreline, 
which  now,  however,  was  not  so  steep,  was  the  only  way. 
We  climbed  the  hill  in  stages  never  more  than  two  hundred 
feet  at  a time.  The  dogs  almost  played  out  before  we 
reached  the  crest,  but  Omarolluk,  going  ahead  some  hundred 
feet,  would  lie  down  on  the  flat  of  his  back  and  with  his 
hands  and  legs  moving  erratically  in  the  air,  imitate  the 
flippers  of  a basking  seal.  As  Nero  would  put  it,  “Dogs, 
him  come.” 

Six  hundred  feet  above  the  sea,  a vast  panorama  lay  out- 
spread below  us,  the  blue  and  white  of  Ungava  Bay  some 
thirty  miles  away^  in  the  middle-ground  the  tangled  skein  of 
the  shorelines  of  Leaf  Gulf.  There  were  islands  of  strangely 
familiar  form,  table- topped,  grotesquely  slanting,  as  if  they 
were  about  to  topple  into  the  sea.  “Kokrak,  tiamitow!” 


94 


MY  ESKIMO  FRIENDS 


(they  are  like  the  islands  of  the  Great  Whale  coast)  ex- 
claimed Omarolluk;  and  so  they  were,  the  formations  identi- 
cal with  the  iron-bearing  formations  of  the  Nastapoka  and 
Belcher  islands — the  link  I had  hoped  to  find  between  Low’s 
discoveries  of  the  interior  some  hundred  miles  southward 
and  his  later  discoveries  three  hundred  miles  northward 
on  Ungava  Bay. 

We  coasted  down  to  sea,  two  miles  of  it,  the  team  gallop- 
ing in  wild  career,  frantic  lest  our  ponderous  sledge  overrun 
their  flying  heels.  Across  the  gulf  we  crawled,  through  deep 
snow  almost  molten  in  the  warm  rays  of  the  April  sun.  By 
nightfall  we  reached  the  gulf’s  east  coast.  Some  hundred 
miles  now  intervened  between  us  and  our  journey’s  end;  but 
the  route  thither  was  overland,  for  the  coast  of  Ungava  Bay, 
owing  to  its  enormous  tides,  is  impassable.  We  knew  that 
there  must  be  a sledge  route  to  Fort  Chimo.  This  Omarolluk 
was  most  anxious  to  find;  otherwise  we  might  spend  several 
days  in  reconnaissance.  We  spent  hours  cross-sectioning 
likely  places  where  were  old  camp  signs,  often  on  hands  and 
knees  brushing  away  a mantle  of  newly  fallen  snow.  But 
no  sledge  tracks  could  we  discover. 

When  morning  broke,  soft  and  warm,  we  were  up  early 
and  breakfasting  on  bannock,  tea,  and  beans,  wondering  the 
while  what  the  day’s  work  would  bring,  when  we  heard  the 
startling  sound  of  voices — “Chimo — o!  chimo — o!”  Two 
old  women  came  toward  us,  waddling  like  penguins  through 
the  snow.  Thinking  we  were  Eskimos  from  somewhere 
northward  along  the  Ungava  coast,  not  until  they  were 
close  up  did  they  realize  their  mistake.  Astonishment  held 
them  in  their  tracks.  Exclaiming  over  and  over  their 


EXPLORATION  OF  NORTHERN  UNGAVA  95 

wonder  and  surprise,  haltingly  they  came  into  the  camp. 
Omarolluk  gave  them  big  mugs  of  tea  and  sea  biscuit.  Soon 
we  were  like  old  friends.  What  palavering  then  went  on! 
“Yes,”  they  said  in  answer  to  the  one  question  uppermost  in 
Omarolluk’s  and  Wetalltok’s  minds,  “the  big  tooktoo  [deer] 
hunt  is  on;  even  now  they  are  migrating  across  the  Kok- 
soak,  and  yes,  many  of  them,  herds  and  herds — like  the 
boulders  upon  land.”  When  we  struck  out  the  men’s  faces 
beamed  at  the  prospect  which  to  them  was  the  climax  to  our 
journey. 

It  was  up  hill  and  down  dale  to  Fort  Chimo,  over  ribs  of 
bare  rock  hills,  winding  through  boulder-strewn  valleys,  and 
across  small,  solitary  disks  of  lakes,  or  over  chains  of  them 
strung  out  like  beads  among  the  folds  of  hills.  We  breasted 
a drifter  the  second  day  out,  so  thick  we  could  hardly 
make  out  the  leader  of  the  team.  Wetunik,  his  leg  lamed 
the  day  before,  followed  limping  behind  the  slow-moving 
sledge.  Near  camp  time  we  reached  the  crest  of  a long, 
steep  hill.  The  dogs  broke  into  galloping;  the  sledge  shot 
after  them  down  through  the  drift-filled  air.  When  we 
reached  level  ground,  the  sledge  ahead  and  the  yelping  dogs 
ploughing  after,  no  Wetunik  could  we  see.  Crawling  into 
the  lee  of  the  sledge  load  we  huddled  for  shelter  and  waited 
for  him  to  come  on.  Minutes  dragged  into  hours.  At  in- 
tervals Omarolluk  fired  the  usual  three  rounds  from  his  Win- 
chester into  the  blanket  of  driving  snow.  It  was  useless  to 
double  back  on  the  trail,  which  now  was  blotted  by  the  drift. 
Darkness  crowded  through  the  storm;  and,  knowing  that  the 
least  of  Wetunik’s  portion  was  a meagre  shelter  behind  some 
boulder  or  an  improvised  cavern  in  the  snow,  gloomily  we 


MY  ESKIMO  FRIENDS 


96 

made  camp,  crawled  into  our  bags,  and  sank  into  sleep. 
Daylight  had  hardly  come  when  the  crunch  of  footsteps 
wakened  us.  Sheepishly  Wetunik  trudged  into  camp. 
Chagrin  underlay  his  smiling  mask  as  he  explained,  between 
gobbles  of  biscuit  and  gulps  of  tea,  that  he  had  spent  the 
night  just  beyond  a hill  not  a mile  away. 

Our  last  day  broke  calm  and  warm  and  clear.  By  noon  we 
picked  up  some  solitary  trees.  “Fort  Chimo,”  said  Omarol- 
luk  as  he  eyed  them,  “is  near.”  Even  the  dogs  seemed  to 
know  what  the  end  of  this  long-desired  day  would  bring. 
The  long  fan  of  their  traces  never  sagged.  We  ran  into 
the  fresh  trail  of  some  post  team.  Amid  a din  of  howl- 
ing, the  dogs  lunged  ahead.  We  came  to  a break  in  the 
level  void  of  plain,  and  the  great  Koksoak  came  into  view. 
On  its  farthest  shore  stood  out  Fort  Chimo — rows  of 
white  cabins,  from  whose  windows  the  evening  sun  re- 
flected bolts  of  fire  which  shone  like  bloodspots  on  the 
snow. 

The  factor,  his  apprentice,  and  I had  hardly  flnished  break- 
fasting the  following  morning,  when  the  post  interpreter 
knocked  on  the  door  and  announced  that  Omarolluk  was 
most  anxious  to  see  me.  “He  says,  sir,”  the  interpreter  be- 
gan, when  I had  joined  them,  “that  what  he  wants  for  you 
to  know  is  about  them  deer;  how  he  only  killed  three;  and 
now,  sir,  he  wants  to  give  you  an  account  of  them  other  two 
deer.  First  he  knowed,  sir  he  says,  is  when  he  stalked  them 
deer  where  they  was  yarded  from  the  storm.  On  account 
of  the  storm  he  gets  close  up  on  them  and  a-crawlin’  through 
the  snow,  and  then  he  aims  at  what  is  easy  hittin’,  sir;  but 
his  bullets  goes  wide — the  first  up  and  over  and  the  next 


EXPLORATION  OF  NORTHERN  UNGAVA  97 

low,  cuttin’  through  the  snow.  ’Twas  only  luck,  sir,  what 
made  him  get  even  three  deer,  and  mighty  glad  he  was  he 
got  ’em,  sir — for  what  happened  was  this:  you  handed 
him  the  wrong  cartridges,  the  t’irty-t’irty’s,  which  as  you 
knows,  sir,  is  too  loose  for  a Winchester  t’ree-o-t’ree.” 


Ill 


The  glamour  of  the  post  and  the  hospitality  their  ad- 
miring friends  heaped  upon  them  were  not  to  stand  in 
the  way  of  the  great  hunt  Omarolluk  and  Wetunik 
had  looked  forward  to  so  long.  One  day  a score  of  Eskimos 
came  into  the  post,  their  sledges  piled  high  with  the  carcasses 
of  deer  from  the  big  kill  up  on  the  Koksoak.  That  was 
enough.  Within  the  day  they  were  off  on  the  deer  hunt  of 
their  lives.  During  the  fortnight  they  were  gone  I returned 
with  the  post  driver  and  team  and  explored  the  iron  ore  for- 
mation find  we  had  made  on  Leaf  Gulf.  My  exploration, 
handicapped  by  the  rapidly  melting  ice  and  snow,  was 
without  result.  Further  exploration,  for  a possible  extension 
of  the  iron  ore  formation  northward  of  Leaf  Gulf,  had  to  be 
left  until  open  water. 

Followed  a long  month  of  inaction  waiting  for  the  break- 
up. The  old  weather  prophets  of  the  post  said  they  had 
never  seen  the  winter  last  so  long.  For  days  the  mile-wide 
expanse  of  river  ice,  though  rotten  enough  to  keep  us  from 
trips  afield,  showed  no  sign  of  breaking.  To  scan  and  specu- 
late over  its  drab  gray  mass  was  the  beginning  and  end  of 
every  day.  The  days  dragged  on.  We  had  almost  given 
up  talking  break-up,  when  an  Eskimo,  his  shouts  resounding, 
came  running  to  our  door.  Servants,  Eskimos,  and  Indians 
were  gathering  along  the  banks  while  a lookout  from  the 
cross  trees  of  the  post’s  flag  mast  pointed  toward  the  river’s 

98 


NYLA 


© Renllon  Freres 


EXPLORATION  OF  NORTHERN  UNGAVA  99 

far  bend  downstream.  With  our  glasses  we  made  out  a long 
blue  lane  of  open  water,  and  pans  of  ice  slowly  twisting  and 
turning  and  sailing  away.  Then  for  two  days  a tumultuous 
army  floated  by — miles  and  miles  of  ice,  raftering  and  rear- 
ing and  overriding  as  it  fought  its  way  to  sea. 

On  the  heels  of  the  ice  came  Indians  in  canoes  from  their 
“land  of  little  sticks” — swampy  Crees  from  the  far  southwest 
over  toward  Hudson  Bay,  and  Nascopies  from  as  far  the 
other  way,  the  Atlantic  slope  of  Labrador.  Unlike  the  more 
prosaic  and  more  sophisticated  Crees,  the  Nascopies  were  a 
wild  and  primitive  throng.  Their  whitish  tan  deerskin  leg- 
gings and  capotes  were  set  off  in  the  geometric  Nascopie 
designs  of  vivid  red  and  blue.  Tall  and  lank  and  straight  as 
the  straightest  tree,  they  strode  with  swinging  hips,  their 
heads  held  high — finely  chiselled  masks  almost  buried  in 
their  shoulder-long  hair.  The  Crees,  whom  through  the 
interpreter  I approached  for  information  as  to  a route  by 
canoe  for  my  return  to  Hudson  Bay,  said  that  even  now 
there  was  bad  going  upstream — an  ice  jam  two  days  away 
and  behind  it  miles  of  floating  ice. 

To  make  a long  story  short,  I abandoned  my  long-laid 
plan  of  returning  with  Omarolluk  and  Wetunik  by  canoe  to 
the  Great  Whale  coast;  for  the  short  summer  would  be  half 
over  before  I reached  it,  and  there  would  be  no  time  left  to 
attempt  another  crossing  to  Wetalltok’s  islands.  Reluc- 
tantly enough  we  made  our  separate  plans:  Omarolluk  and 
Wetunik  to  return  to  their  anxious  wives  at  Great  Whale, 
and  myself  with  Fort  Chimo  Eskimos  to  strike  off  northward 
through  new  country.  The  post  people,  the  servants,  the 
Crees,  the  Nascopies,  and  the  Eskimos  crowded  about  the 


lOO 


MY  ESKIMO  FRIENDS 


landing  to  see  Omarolluk  and  Wetunik  go — Wetunik  with 
his  beloved  bob-tailed  dog  (one  of  the  staunchest  of  our  team) 
crouched  in  the  bow,  then  Omarolluk  with  a young  boy  of 
eight  years  before  him,  whom  he  explained  to  me  he  had 
adopted  since  his  wife  gave  him  none  but  girls,  settled  in  the 
stern.  As  admiring  friends  began  calling  out  farewell,  they 
dug  down  into  their  pockets  and  fetched  forth  what  seemed 
to  be  two  balls  of  red  cotton  rags.  Impressively  they  un- 
wound them;  and  when  some  yard  or  more  of  cotton  had  been 
reeled  off,  what  lay  in  their  hands  were  two  trade  watches 
which  I had  given  them  as  presents  the  day  before.  “Ah!” 
said  everyone.  Of  course  they  could  not  tell  the  time,  but 
carefully  they  compared  them  to  see  that  they  agreed;  then 
more  carefully  still  wrapped  their  treasures  up,  waved  to  us 
with  their  paddles,  and  shoved  off. 

Eskimo  hunters  coming  up  river  by  kayak  reported  the 
coast  ice-free — an  ice  condition  in  Ungava  Bay  as  early  as 
the  Koksoak  was  late.  This  turn  of  fortune  opened  up  a 
new  and  more  interesting  plan,  a traverse  of  the  peninsula 
northward  of  the  one  I had  just  completed  from  Ungava  Bay 
to  Hudson  Bay.  This  traverse  would  open  up  a representa- 
tive section  of  the  unexplored  area  remaining. 

Overnight  I decided  upon  the  attempt.  The  little  post  of 
Fort  Chimo  hummed  (if  a fur  post  ever  can  hum)  with  active 
preparations.  The  factors  of  both  posts,  Hudson’s  Bay  and 
Revillon’s,  vied  with  one  another  to  help  with  the  outfitting. 
The  Hudson’s  Bay  people  gave  me  one  Nuckey,  their  best 
man,  and  Nawri,  and  young  Ahegeek,  son  of  old  Ahe- 
geek,  who  was  chief  of  his  tribe,  and  Ambrose,  son  of  the  Dog 
Woman.  From  trade  canvas  secured  from  Revillon’s  a 


EXPLORATION  OF  NORTHERN  UNGAVA  loi 


native  seamstress  fashioned  a fly-proof  tent,  sewing  every 
seam  of  it  with  the  sinew  of  a deer.  My  food  supply 
^ — beans,  bacon,  dried  fruit,  jerked  deer  meat,  sugar,  tobacco, 
and  tea — was  estimated  to  be  sufficient  to  last  the  five  of  us 
two  months.  The  canoe  was  a huge  Peterboro,  twenty-five 
feet  long,  capable  of  a load  of  forty-five  hundred  pounds — 
one  that  the  Revillon  factor  had  imported  some  years  before 
for  a party  of  Nascopie  packeteers  for  use  in  the  big  rapids  of 
the  Koksoak.  The  Indians,  however,  refused  to  use  it.  A 
“man-killer,”  they  called  it,  too  heavy  for  the  portages;  so 
for  years  it  had  lain  idle  in  the  loft  of  the  fur  post.  It  was 
just  the  kind  of  craft  we  needed,  however;  big  enough  to 
weather  the  seas  along  the  hundreds  of  miles  of  sea  coast  we 
must  travel. 

Curious  Crees  and  long-haired  Nascopies;  fur-clad  Es- 
kimos and  post  half-breeds  in  capotes  and  scarlet  sashes; 
servants,  wives,  babes,  and  children,  stood  at  the  edge  of  the 
banks.  Farewells  were  soon  over.  The  Indians  shook  with 
laughter  when  Nuckey  and  his  three  men,  bearing  the  “man- 
killer”  on  their  shoulders,  passed  them  by.  We  climbed 
aboard  the  Walrus^  a diminutive  sloop  of  open  hold  and 
twenty-nine  feet  of  keel.  She  was  already  loaded  rails  down 
— four  Eskimo  hunters,  their  wives  and  children  and  dogs, 
and  a yelping  litter  of  pups.  Within  two  hours  we  were 
standing  out  on  the  glass  calm  of  Ungava  Bay.  Through 
the  gray  twilight  of  the  night  we  drifted  aimlessly  with 
the  tide,  all  but  the  helmsman,  Nuckey,  the  nest  of  puppies, 
and  myself  stretched  out  asleep  on  deck  or  in  the  hold. 

For  two  days  we  sailed  slowly  along  before  light  catspaws 
of  wind,  the  hunters  scooting  like  water  bugs  in  their  kayaks 


102 


MY  ESKIMO  FRIENDS 


ahead  of  us,  on  the  alert  for  seal.  The  coast  was  low,  deso- 
late— long  fangs  of  points  reaching  for  miles  out  to  sea; 
flocks  of  bare  rock  islands,  and  over  them  gigantic  blocks  of 
sea  ice,  gleaming  white  and  green,  lying  stranded  by  the 
enormous  fall  of  tide.  When  the  tide  flooded  in  (a  rise  of 
forty  feet)  the  islands  were  erased  from  view  and  the  blocks 
of  ice  floated  willy-nilly  on  the  sea.  On  the  third  day  low 
clouds  came  scudding  out  of  the  east,  where  an  ice  blink 
loomed  in  the  sky.  “Seeco — the  ice,”  said  Nuckey, 
and  we  altered  our  course  toward  land.  Great  white  lumps 
of  bergs,  resplendent  in  the  ethereal  light  of  the  low-hanging 
sun,  came  sailing  in  majestically  with  the  ice  pack  from  sea. 
Before  the  day  was  over  we  were  prisoners  on  a small,  high 
rock  of  island.  The  ice  raftered  in  a gigantic  ring  around 
us.  For  three  days  gales  of  wind  blew  out  of  the  east, 
until  it  seemed  that  the  ice  from  all  the  North  Atlantic,  the 
boom  and  slosh  and  rasp  of  it  resounding,  was  crowding  in. 

When  the  gale  died  down,  the  sea  was  a solid  mass  of  ice; 
but  soon  the  ebb  and  flow  of  tide  opened  lanes  that  wound 
like  ribbons  through  it.  Through  them  we  made  our  way, 
the  kayaks  signalling  where  to  follow.  Often  a day’s  jour- 
neying, winding  as  we  did,  covered  but  a few  miles  as  the 
crow  flies.  Often  we  were  caught  on  some  bleak  little  island 
and  held  prisoners  there  for  days  on  end. 

Finally  we  reached  the  wide,  open  arms  of  Payne  Bay.  At 
the  head  of  it,  where  the  Payne  debouches  over  a multitude 
of  boulder  channels  to  the  sea,  the  Walrus  reached  her  jour- 
ney’s end.  Here  all  hands  debarked,  and  camp  was  made  on 
shore  amid  a confusion  of  sea-drenched  garments  outspread 
on  boulders  to  dry.  Within  two  days  the  women’s  work  of 


EXPLORATION  OF  NORTHERN  UNGAVA  103 


mending  boots  and  garments,  and  our  work  of  repairing  out- 
fit and  going  over  food,  were  done,  and  the  “man-killer” 
stood  loaded  and  waiting  offshore.  Then  came  the  last 
farewells  among  the  good  friends  around.  They  climbed  to 
the  hills  and  watched  us  until  we  were  buried  in  the  winding 
of  the  unknown  stream. 

A splendid  river  is  the  Payne,  larger  than  the  Gatineau  of 
the  Ottawa  River  system  in  Lower  Canada.^  Enchanting 
pictures  were  the  great  terrace-strung  slopes  at  either  hand, 
towering  hundreds  of  feet  above  us.  Here  and  there  were 
white  streaks  and  bridal  veils  of  torrents  cascading  down. 
The  narrow  level  plains  along  the  river’s  edge  were  carpeted 
with  tan  and  russet  mosses,  and  flowers  purple,  white,  and 
yellow — solid  banks  of  colour,  with  bees  and  butterflies 
among  them.  Haunting  it  was  and  mysteriously  beautiful 
in  the  ethereal  light  of  those  low  northern  suns. 

There  never  was  a more  happy  or  carefree  crew  than  we 
five.  Banter,  smiles,  and  laughter  were  our  stock  in  trade. 
Day  and  night  to  us  were  almost  the  same,  and  there  was  no 
watch  to  space  them.  We  ate  and  slept  when  we  willed. 

One  day  as  we  sailed  along  with  a light  draft  of  wind  be- 
hind us  Nawri,  in  an  astonished  voice,  suddenly  called: 
“Innuet!  Innuet!”  For  the  moment  I could  hardly  be- 
lieve my  eyes,  for  an  Eskimo  in  this  place,  of  all  places,  was 
the  last  thing  I dreamed  of  seeing.  Where  Nawri  pointed  I 
made  out  a kayak  quickly  scooting  out  from  shore  to  an  is- 
land rock.  As  we  drew  nearer  we  saw  the  kayaker  peering 

^The  Payne  was  named  by  Low  when  he  explored  its  mouth  during  his  exploration  of  the 
west  coast  of  Ungava  Bay  in  1898.  (See  A.  P.  Low:  Report  on  an  Exploration  of  Part  of 
the  South  Shore  of  Hudson  Strait  and  of  Ungava  Bay,  Report  L of  Annual  Kept.  Geol. 
Survey  of  Canada,  vol.  XI  for  1898,  Ottawa,  1901.) 


MY  ESKIMO  FRIENDS 


104 

at  us  from  behind  a screen  of  boulders  on  the  island’s  crest. 
At  shouting  range  Nawri  called  “Chimo.”  He  stood  up 
then  and  in  a queer  tremulous  voice  answered.  It  was  plain 
he  did  not  know  what  to  make  of  us;  but  soon,  reassured,  he 
paddled  alongside  and  became  quite  happy  when  the  men 
explained  our  presence.  As  we  neared  his  encampment  he 
called  out  to  his  huddled  family,  jokingly,  something  about 
the  Adelite  (Indian)  coming.  For  even  to  this  day  is  the 
Indian  dreaded.  This  native,  whose  name  was  Gwack,  to- 
gether with  his  family,  a grown-up  son,  two  wives,  a grand- 
mother, some  half-dozen  small  children,  an  army  of  dogs, 
and  a tame  sea  gull  tied  by  a thong,  was  living  on  the  Arctic 
salmon  resources  of  the  river  near  by.  A plentiful  supply, 
cleaned  and  split,  was  spread  about  on  the  ground  curing 
in  the  sun. 

The  one  dependable  source  of  food  supply  for  the  natives 
who  travel  the  interior  in  summer  is  fish,  particularly  the 
namaycushy  the  great  lake  trout,  and  a finer-eating  fish  does 
not  exist.  We  caught  them  up  to  four  feet  in  length  with 
cod  hooks,  baited  with  pork  and  red  flannel,  so  easily  that 
we  had  no  occasion  to  use  our  nets  during  the  entire  journey. 

Nawri  mentioned  that  Gwack  was  a Great  Whale  River 
Eskimo  and  that  he  had  through  the  preceding  months  of 
winter  hunted  his  way  to  the  Payne  with  dogs  and  sledge 
through  the  waterways  of  the  interior.  From  Great  Whale 
River  to  this  point  seemed  to  me  a hazardous  journey,  as  he 
would  have  to  take  circuitous  courses  and  fish  through  the 
ice  for  food.  Far  journeys  have  been  made  by  criminal 
Eskimos,  fleeing  from  the  vengeance  of  their  fellows,  and 
Gwack’s  presence  here,  a hundred  miles  beyond  the  habita- 


EXPLORATION  OF  NORTHERN  UNGAVA  105 

tion  of  his  people,  seemed  strongly  indicative  of  something 
irregular.  Nor  did  he  look  at  all  incapable  of  it.  He  was 
bald  to  the  ears — the  only  bald  native  I have  ever  seen— 
which,  combined  with  his  sinister,  weather-scarred  mask, 
made  him  not  a prepossessing  object. 

Ten  days  on  from  Gwack’s  encampment,  ice  lay  stranded 
along  either  shore — a sure  sign  that  there  was  ice  still  re- 
maining in  the  big  lakes  of  the  interior.  We  came  to  where 
the  river  divided.  The  southern  fork,  the  larger,  is  the  out- 
let of  the  great  lake,  Teeseriuk.  Said  Nawri:  “If  there  is 
ice  in  the  lakes  before  us,  in  the  great  Teeseriuk  we  shall  be 
sure  to  find  more  of  it — enough,  perhaps,  to  block  our  way; 
whereas  [tracing  a map  of  both  forks  in  the  sand  before  him] 
if  we  ascend  the  northern  fork  we  shall  probably  find  the 
lakes  both  small  and  shoal,  and  consequently  find  less  ice.” 
I was  keenly  disappointed  not  to  descend  the  lower  fork,  for 
Teeseriuk,  if  what  the  Eskimos  who  have  one  time  hunted 
there  say  is  true,  is  a vast  body  of  water,  the  largest  in  all 
Ungava — “four  days’  fast  kayaking,”  said  Nawri,  “before 
one  sees  the  western  end.  The  waves  when  the  wind  blows 
hard  are  big,  almost  like  the  sea,  and  too,  in  winter  the  ice 
rafts  and  fissures  like  the  tiahoke  seeco  [sea  ice.]”  That 
Teeseriuk  is  probably  one  of  the  great  lakes  of  northeastern 
Canada  I have  no  doubt. 

Ice  or  no  ice,  what  we  did  encounter  in  the  ascent  of  the 
north  fork  could  hardly  have  been  more  difficult.  The 
stream,  narrowing  to  nothing  more  than  a V-shaped  trough, 
was  for  miles  on  end  a white  race  of  water.  Our  tracking 
ground  was  a treacherous  surface  of  ten-foot  banks  of  ice 
that  had  been  stranded  alongshore  by  the  fall  of  the  river 


io6 


MY  ESKIMO  FRIENDS 


following  the  break-up  some  few  weeks  before.  Three 
tracked  the  “man-killer”  while  Nawri,  standing  in  the  stern, 
worked  her  nose  around  the  shoals  and  boulders  and  blocks 
of  stranded  ice.  There  was  one  rapid  draw  so  swift  that 
Nawri  and  I had  to  bend  with  the  men  to  the  tracking-line, 
whilst  the  “man-killer,”  awash  to  her  gunwales,  came  on  by 
inches. 

For  three  days  we  toiled.  We  had  begun  to  believe  that 
the  white  water  would  never  end.  Came  the  swiftest 
stretch  of  all.  We  were  almost  over  it,  when  our  stout  seal- 
skin tracking-line,  catching  against  a sharp-edged  boulder, 
snapped  in  two.  The  “man-killer,”  with  our  all  in  all  in- 
side her,  swung  broadside  on  and  went  off  galloping  down- 
stream. Pell-mell  we  raced  along  the  ice  banks.  Coming 
to  where  the  river  doubled  around  a point,  Nawri  jumped  in 
to  his  waist,  and  balancing  himself  with  his  paddle,  barely 
caught  the  dangling  end  of  the  tracking-line  as  the  “man- 
killer”  swept  by. 

Larger  and  larger  were  the  banks  of  winter  snow.  They 
enhanced  the  melancholy  of  the  boulder-strewn  hills  and 
plains.  Finally  we  came  into  a region  where  the  river  be- 
came nothing  but  short  links  to  multitudes  of  lakes  and 
lonely,  God-forsaken  ponds,  so  shoal  that  one  could  almost 
wade  across  them.  The  colourless,  long-sloped  country 
around  them  matched  their  tone  of  leaden  gray.  Often  we 
launched  out  from  some  toilsome  portage  upon  what  we  felt 
sure  was  a paddle  of  at  least  an  hour’s  length,  only  to  find 
ourselves  out  on  shore  again  within  a mile.  On  the  seven- 
teenth of  July  we  reached  the  point  where  our  one-time  for- 
midable stream  was  nothing  but  a frothing  creek.  Said 


EXPLORATION  OF  NORTHERN  UNGAVA  107 

Nawri:  “We  are  near  the  height  of  land.  My  father  used 
to  say  that  the  Eskimos  from  the  western  sea  [Hudson  Bay] 
came  in  here  where  these  rivers  begin;  so  the  river  they  as- 
cended cannot  be  far  away.” 

We  decided  in  the  morning  to  go  off  in  different  directions, 
each  of  us  on  the  lookout  for  the  beginning  of  a river  that 
would  lead  us  down  to  Hudson  Bay. 

While  we  were  pitching  camp,  thick  lowering  banks  of 
cloud,  that  all  day  long  had  been  slowly  gathering  in  the  sky 
and  hanging  low  over  the  gloom  of  valleys  and  far-off  hills, 
began  twisting  in  the  rising  wind.  Loons,  far  and  near, 
called  out  wildly  as  they  flew  like  rockets  through  the  air. 
The  wind  grew  stronger.  It  scattered  our  precious  supper 
fire  to  the  four  points  of  the  compass;  and  then,  like  regi- 
ments, came  walls  of  rain.  We  crawled  supperless  into 
camp.  There  was  no  let-up  through  the  night.  When  we 
wakened  in  the  morning,  thick  wet  snow  was  flying  through 
the  air.  For  the  next  two  days  we  were  prisoners  within  the 
cramped,  flapping  shelter  of  the  tent.  Cold  water  and  sea 
biscuit  was  our  food,  for  the  moss,  sole  source  of  fuel,  was 
sodden  through.  The  moss-carpeted  ground  under  us  was 
like  a sponge,  and  there  was  no  heat  to  dry  wet  clothes  and 
blankets;  but  as  ever  the  crew  were  full  of  jokes  and  banter. 

On  the  third  day  the  storm  was  gone,  and  a soft  yellow 
sun  from  low  down  in  the  north  enwrapped  the  snow-swept 
hills  and  plain.  By  overturning  large  boulders  we  secured 
great  armfuls  of  moss.  In  the  open  end,  over  a fireplace 
of  cobblestones,  we  took  turns  at  blowing  the  flame  which 
must  be  constantly  fed,  since  the  moss  burned  almost  as 
rapidly  as  paper.  The  smoke,  pungent  as  that  of  burn- 


io8 


MY  ESKIMO  FRIENDS 


ing  rags,  filled  our  dripping  eyes;  but,  though  the  moss 
smoke  had  strongly  flavoured  them,  we  had  warmed  our 
beans  and  boiled  our  beloved  tea. 

All  through  the  next  day  we  scouted  through  wet,  ankle- 
deep  snow  for  signs  of  a route.  At  nightfall,  as  Nuckey  and 
I were  tramping  back  toward  camp,  we  fell  in  with  Nawri, 
who  was  carrying  the  weathered  blade  of  an  old  kayak  paddle. 
He  knew  by  the  shape  of  it,  he  said,  that  it  was  the  fragment 
of  a paddle  used  by  the  Eskimos  from  Hudson  Bay.  He 
came  to  their  old  camp  signs  too,  he  continued,  by  the 
bank  of  a westward-flowing  stream.  If  we  portaged  down, 
he  was  sure  we  would  come  to  the  little  lake-beginning  of 
the  route  we  desired  so  much  to  find.  For  two  days  we 
portaged  on,  over  soft,  yielding  mossy  ground  where  our 
steps  weighed  like  lead,  and  over  acres  of  big,  close-packed 
boulders.  We  made  two  trips  on  every  portage — one  with 
the  outfit  (the  loads  ranged  from  150  to  Nawri’s  250  pounds) 
and  one  with  the  well-named  “man-killer,”  which  came 
belly-up  on  the  aching  shoulders  of  the  crew.  The  third 
day,  launched  on  a man-sized  stream,  we  were  whipping  our 
paddles  toward  the  western  sea.  The  boulder-strewn  deso- 
lation of  the  height  of  land  gave  way  to  higher  and  higher 
hills.  The  tawn  and  russet  mosses  of  the  spoons  of  valleys 
that  lay  between  shone  like  velvet  in  the  soft  yellow  of  the 
sun.  Everywhere  were  old  camp  signs  of  deer-hunting 
Eskimos  of  generations  gone  by.  We  saw  old  deer  trails, 
worn  in  the  solid  bed-rock,  where  countless  thousands  must 
have  passed,  and  near  them  boulder  blinds  where  the  hunters 
had  lain  in  wait  for  them;  and  at  one  point,  as  we  swung  into 
a new  bend  of  stream,  I saw  what  seemed  to  be  a herd  of 


EXPLORATION  OF  NORTHERN  UNGAVA  109 

grazing  deer.  They  were  merely  decoys — two  big  boulders, 
the  small  one  atop  the  large,  spread  out  on  the  distant  plain. 

Lakes  innumerable,  large  and  small,  linked  our  ever- 
growing stream.  On  the  larger  lakes,  choked  as  they  were 
with  islands,  the  outlets  took  hours  of  paddling  and  climbing 
into  the  hills  to  find.  One  day  we  swept,  tumbling  over  a 
mile-long  canyon,  into  the  arms  of  another  and  im- 
pressively larger  stream.  There  were  fewer  but  larger  lakes 
from  now  on — one  lake  so  long  that  its  far  horizon  was  a 
faint  blue  line.  It  was  still  half-filled  with  the  winter’s 
ice,  but  we  could  always  pick  out  some  blue  lane  to  follow 
through.  There  was  now  no  longer  the  melancholy  gloom 
of  lowering  skies.  The  purple,  white,  and  yellow  banks  of 
flowers,  the  gray  knobs  of  hills,  the  russet  sweeps  of  plain, 
and  the  green  emerald  of  the  great  river,  were  vibrant  in  the 
air.  Fish — great,  red-fleshed  trout,  sometimes  more  than 
four  feet  long — we  caught  whenever  we  wanted  them. 
Winds  from  the  east  followed  unfailingly,  and  where  the 
glorious  river  ran  white  we  could  usually  jump  the  “man- 
killer”  through,  two  or  three  miles  of  it  sometimes,  the  wind 
cutting  our  faces,  the  white-and-black  bottom  of  sand  and 
boulders  a blur  as  we  sped  by. 

By  the  receded  sea  beaches  along  the  river  banks  and  the 
appearance  of  clumps  of  stunted  willows,  we  knew  when  we 
were  nearing  Hudson  Bay.  The  higher  hills  we  often 
climbed  for  a view  of  it,  but  gleaming  loops  of  river  were  all 
that  we  could  see.  The  first  day  of  August  at  noon  we  left 
the  wallowing  seas  of  a big  lake  expansion  and  slipped  into 
the  shelter  of  its  outlet,  the  river.  Within  a mile  the  river 
broke  into  heavy  rapids.  Once  over  the  draw,  like  a shot 


I lO 


MY  ESKIMO  FRIENDS 


the  “man-killer”  was  drawn  down.  Came  shouts  and  yells 
from  the  bowsman.  The  crew  joined  in.  Were  we  trapped, 
about  to  ride  to  eternity  over  the  brink  of  some  giant  fall? 
More  wildly  they  yelled;  they  paddled  like  madmen.  Swim- 
ming down  the  rapid  was  a half-grown  goose.  What  a race 
between  that  God-forsaken  gosling  and  the  frenzied  crew! 
The  “man-killer,”  swinging  broadside-on,  came  within  an 
ace  of  filling.  By  the  time  we  had  swung  her  round  we  had 
shot  from  the  rapid’s  tail  into  a still,  clear  pool.  We  were 
laughing  still  over  the  goose  chase,  when  Nawri  pointed  to 
some  sea-weed  near  shore.  We  glided  slowly  around  a 
point.  Before  us  lay  the  sea.  We  tasted  the  water  to  make 
sure. 

We  struck  north  along  the  coast.  Before  the  hour  was 
out  we  saw  the  last  of  the  great  Povungnituk,  one  of  the 
greatest  rivers  in  all  Labrador.*  Within  ten  miles  we  found 
what  we  had  hoped  for — the  topeks  of  some  Eskimos. 
Scurrying  figures,  obviously  apprising  their  occupants  of  our 
arrival,  were  sharply  silhouetted  against  the  sky.  They 
disappeared  as  we  drew  near.  Only  the  dogs  crawled  about, 
or  lay  asleep  on  the  ground.  Inquiringly  I turned  to  Nawri. 
“Innuet  immaitame,”  he  replied  (the  custom  of  the  people). 
“Innuet  ho  ho!”  he  called  out,  as  the  “man-killer”  grounded 
on  the  beach.  Embarrassingly  long  was  the  interval  that 
followed  before  a tent  flap  flew  open  and  an  old  Eskimo,  rub- 
bing his  eyes,  came  slowly  out.  Every  tent  door  opened 
then,  and  men,  women,  babes,  and  children  were  soon  crowd- 
ing around  us.  We  pitched  camp  amongst  them,  and  gave 


nts  volume  is  nearly  equal  to  the  Ottawa,  the  largest  tributary  of  the  St.  Lawrence 
(See  Report  on  Exploration  of  East  Coast  of  Hudson  Bay,  A.  P.  Low,  Volume  XIII,  for 
J900,  Ottawa,  1902.) 


EXPLORATION  OF  NORTHERN  UNGAVA  in 


them  tobaccomik  and  tea.  They  shared  with  us  berries, 
salmon  freshly  killed  and  the  eggs  of  eiders.  On  the  floor  of 
the  largest  topek  I spread  out  my  map  of  the  coast  of  Hudson 
Bay  and  they  traced  with  their  fingers  and  told  us  where  we 
might  find  driftwood  and  where  there  might  be  camps  of 
Eskimos.  What  pleased  us  most  of  all  was  their  assurance 
that  there  was  no  more  ice — everywhere  the  coast  was  clear. 

Northward  along  the  desolate  boulder-strewn  waste  of 
low-lying  country;  across  the  mouths  of  narrow,  deep, 
winding  bays;  and  in  amongst  small  rocks  of  islands,  we 
made  our  way.  When  we  pitched  camp  at  nightfall  we 
found,  as  the  friendly  Eskimos  had  said,  enough  driftwood 
for  fire — the  first  real  warm  fire  since  far-off  Ungava  Bay. 
We  hovered  round  it  half  through  the  night.  Morning 
came,  calm,  clear,  and  so  warm  that  we  had  no  mind  for 
paddling.  The  seals  kept  bobbing  up  around  us,  and  there 
were  schools  of  white  whales  playing  near  the  shoals  offshore, 
and  school  after  school  of  steel  and  silver  salmon  scurrying 
from  under  our  canoe.  The  crew  were  like  a crowd  of  boys, 
bubbling  with  excitement,  exclaiming  their  “ayee’s”  as 
these  golden  treasures  passed  by.  All  day  long  we  half 
paddled,  half  drifted,  on  the  overwhelming  blue  of  the  sea 
around  us — blue  and  still  as  the  sky.  The  paralleling  thread 
of  coastline  fell  away.  The  nearest  coast  now  lay  ahead 
some  four  miles  to  northward.  Night  came  on.  We 
headed  toward  the  distant  shore.  We  took  our  time,  for 
there  was  driftwood  aboard  with  which  to  build  another 
great  fire.  Our  beds  would  be  on  the  moss  beside  it.  We 
paddled  on,  unconcerned.  But  as  the  night  deepened 
a wind  rose.  It  cut  our  faces.  We  strained  through  the 


II2 


MY  ESKIMO  FRIENDS 


gloom  toward  the  shadow  which  was  land.  The  wind 
blew  harder.  We  dug  in,  Nawri’s  “kiyee!  kiyee!”  stroking 
us.  Big  seas  broke  hard  over  the  “man-killer’s”  nose.  We 
were  fighting  for  inches,  when  above  the  piping  of  the  wind, 
the  smash  of  water  and  the  din  of  paddles  thumping  on  the 
gunwales,  we  heard  the  wash  of  surf.  Soon  we  made  the  lee 
of  land. 


IV 


Though  the  wind  still  was  strong,  by  morning  it 
blew  offshore.  We  sailed  on.  By  nightfall  the 
colossal  form  of  Cape  Smith,  wrapped  in  haze,  lay 
prostrate  across  the  thin  line  of  coast.  On  its  crest,  one 
thousand  eight  hundred  feet  half-sheer  from  sea,  died  the 
last  yellow  shaft  of  sun.  We  were  camped  on  a moss  sward 
of  shore,  gathered  around  a great  roaring  driftwood 
fire,  when  from  out  of  the  darkness  came  three  Eskimos. 
They  stood  frozen  in  their  tracks  when  they  saw  myself — 
the  kablunak — and  around  me  strange  Eskimos.  But  in  a 
few  moments  Nawri  had  us  all  to  rights,  and  with  a steaming 
kettle  of  tea  before  us  we  were  grouped  happily  around  the 
fire. 

“Yes,”  their  spokesman  said,  “the  sea  ice,  only  two  sleeps 
ago,  an  east  wind  swept  to  sea;  so  all  of  the  way  to  the  big 
land  to  the  north  [that  is.  Cape  Wolstenholme]  the  coast  is 
clear.”  With  Nawri  they  went  over  my  map  and  showed 
me  where  there  might  be  camp  grounds  of  other  Eskimos;  but 
driftwood,  said  they,  we  would  not  be  likely  from  now  on  to 
find.  Never  did  Eskimo  so  quickly  gulp  down  the  few 
scraps  of  food  we  had  to  spare,  and  the  tobaccomik  and  tea 
we  gave  them  they  held  close  with  trembling  hands,  when 
finally  they  bade  us  “chimo”  and  strode  off  through  the 
gloom. 

Again  the  sky  was  cold  and  lowering.  The  wind  following 

113 


MY  ESKIMO  FRIENDS 


114 

blew  strong.  The  “man-killer”  had  all  she  could  do  to 
mount  the  seas.  We  reefed  the  leg-o’-mutton.  A bawling 
wake  wound  out  astern.  The  leg-o’-mutton,  swaying  gro- 
tesquely, frightened  flocks  of  gulls  that,  flapping  from  the 
nearby  reefs,  wheeled  over  us  in  the  air.  By  noon  the  coast 
hung  out  over  us — gigantic  tapestries  mottled  green,  russet, 
and  terra  cotta,  veined  and  interveined  with  milk-and-yellow 
quartz,  one  thousand  feet  to  where  they  met  the  gray  sky. 
The  strata  upon  strata  of  white  dots  which  stood  out  against 
them  were  gulls.  The  green  seas  were  clotted  here  and 
there  with  sea  pigeons,  and  eiders  in  black  swarms  like  flies 
circled  us.  Among  the  rocks  of  one  talus  slope  lay  a splotch 
of  white — a dead  Arctic  fox,  so  Nawri  said,  fallen  from  the 
cliff  whilst  poaching. 

Mile  upon  mile  the  speck  of  us  sailed.  Wilder  were  the 
seas.  Puffs  and  squalls  swooped  straight  down.  The 
threshing  Icg-o’-mutton  shook  the  “man-killer”  as  a terrier 
shakes  a bone.  Came  a break  in  the  clouds  in  the  angry 
west,  and  the  sun  as  it  was  sinking  broke  out.  Like  a 
searchlight  it  raked  through  the  gloom.  But  nowhere  was 
there  a landing;  no  niche,  no  talus  slope,  nor  even  a projecting 
ledge  big  enough  to  land  the  “man-killer”  on.  The  dirge 
of  the  sea  throbbing  through  the  cliffs;  the  wild,  weird  call- 
ing of  the  sea  fowl;  and  the  roaring  of  the  wind — we  had  all 
but  given  up  hope,  when  Nawri  in  the  bow  shot  up  and  with 
his  paddle  pointed  ahead.  The  helmsmen — it  took  two  of 
them  to  hold  her — swung  the  “man-killer’s”  nose.  She 
waddled  for  a moment,  until  the  leg-o’-mutton  filled  and  she 
shot  into  the  wide-open  arms  of  a tiny  cove  and  rammed  her 
nose  full  speed  upon  shore. 


■ J" 


(k 

V • 


Jt 


1 


THE  WALRUS  HUNTER 


i 

I 


i 


'i  I' 

I':,  I 
! 

'I 

I I' 


[ i 
I I 


EXPLORATION  OF  NORTHERN  UNGAVA  115 

“We  cannot  take  the  omiak  farther,”  said  Nawri.  A slot 
of  a valley  rose  in  half-sheer  steps,  winding  up  to  the  snow- 
clad  tableland  fifteen  hundred  feet  above.  The  “man- 
killer,”  the  leg-o’-mutton,  all  but  the  clothes  we  wore,  and 
the  last  few  scraps  of  food,  we  reluctantly  abandoned  to 
climb  the  valley,  thence  over  the  tablelands  to  pick  our  way 
to  what  on  my  map  was  Eric  Cove. 

The  night  was  light  enough,  for  all  through  it  welts  of  red 
and  yellow  from  the  not  far-sunken  sun  stood  out  in  the 
north.  Up  half  sheer  faces  of  cliffs,  on  hands  and  knees 
scrambling  over  the  talus,  and  knee-deep  through  banks  of 
sodden  snow  we  climbed  to  the  tablelands;  then  on,  half  bent 
into  the  wind,  over  plains  of  snow  that  never  disappear,  we 
tramped  through  darkness.  It  was  midnight  when  Nawri 
halted  us  abruptly.  Before  us  stood  a void  and  down  into 
it  wound  a tongue  of  snow,  its  far  end  lost  in  gloom.  Down 
through  the  snow  and  on  to  where  it  gave  way  to  a wild, 
roaring  stream,  on  till  the  cliffs  were  crowding  high,  tortu- 
ously we  picked  our  way.  Finally  the  ravine  widened, 
the  stream  smoothed  out  to  long,  silent  reaches,  and  before 
us  a single  square  of  yellow  light  shone  through  the  darkness. 
“Kablunak!”  exclaimed  the  men. 

A more  desolate  post  than  Wolstenholme  I have  never 
seen.  Three  sheds  of  houses  stand  on  a narrow  strand  be- 
tween gigantic  flanks  of  bare,  ice-scoured  hills.  Wind, 
roaring  down  the  flume  of  valley,  blasts  them  with  sand  and 
gravel.  At  either  hand  down  into  the  low-lying  coast  of 
Hudson  Bay,  or  eastward  along  the  bold,  sheer  headlands  of 
Hudson  Strait,  the  next  two  posts  of  the  solitary  fur  men 
are  hundreds  of  miles  away.  But  my  host,  the  factor,  though 


MY  ESKIMO  FRIENDS 


1 16 

his  companions  were  none  save  Eskimos  and  his  scanty 
rations  came  out  of  not  too  various  cans,  was  contented 
enough.  Said  he,  “Indeed,  I enjoys  it,  sir,” 

I had  expected  that  by  the  time  of  my  arrival  the  fur 
ship  from  England  would  long  since  have  passed  into  Hud- 
son Bay.  Upon  her,  outward  bound,  I planned  to  take 
passage  to  Lower  Canada.  But  no  ship  had  come,  none 
but  a whaler  ship  had  been  seen  from  the  headlands,  working 
through  the  ice.  The  days  dragged  on.  The  first  week  of 
August  came  and  was  gone.  No  ship  had  ever  been  so  late. 
We  began  to  think  she  never  would  come;  and  the  prospect 
of  a second  winter  in  the  country,  at  God-forsaken  Wol- 
stenholme,  was  staring  me  in  the  face  when,  on  the  bright 
morning  of  the  eighth  of  August,  came  the  welcome  cry: 
“Omiak!  Omiak!” 

The  “man-killer’s”  crew  followed  me  down  over  the  sand. 
We  shook  hands.  They  inquired  if  ever  they  would  see  me 
again — if  they  did,  I should  have  no  journey  too  long  for 
them  to  make. 


PART  IV 


FILMS 


FILMS 


I 

ON  MY  third  expedition  into  the  north,  in  1913,  when 
we  set  out  from  Newfoundland  in  the  Laddie^  I 
included  in  my  equipment  all  the  necessary  appara- 
tus for  making  a motion  picture  film  of  the  Eskimos. 

As  the  reader  will  remember,  from  St.  John’s,  Newfound- 
land, we  sailed  north  along  the  coast  of  Labrador  to  the 
mouth  of  Hudson  Strait.  Owing  to  the  heavy  winds  which 
prevailed  in  the  Strait  and  the  lateness  of  the  season  we  had 
to  abandon  our  original  idea  of  wintering  in  Hudson  Bay. 
So  we  put  into  the  rugged  snow-capped  coast  of  Baffin  Land. 

We  cruised  over  mysterious  bays  and  among  tide-washed 
rocks  and  craggy  islands.  The  tide,  what  with  its  rise  and 
fall  of  over  thirty  feet,  submerged,  as  it  rose,  and  laid  bare 
as  it  fell,  numberless  reefs.  In  the  first  good  harbour  we 
anchored  ship.  On  the  lookout  for  Eskimos,  with  the  launch 
we  chugged  on  through  still  more  groups  of  islands.  The 
day  was  almost  gone  when,  clearing  the  island  mask,  we 
came  upon  big  half-sheer  cliffs  of  mainland.  We  had  just 
about  given  up  hope  of  seeing  Eskimos,  when  the  bowsman 
pointed  toward  shore.  We  made  out  three  topeks. 

We  called  the  usual  “Chimo!  chimo!”  A towsly  head 
appeared,  and  an  old  woman  came  out  haltingly,  holding  a 
naked  babe  in  her  arms.  We  knew  then  that  there  were 


I 20 


MY  ESKIMO  FRIENDS 


only  women  in  the  camp.  Their  men,  said  they,  were  in- 
land, deer-hunting  among  the  hills.  Trade  candy,  of 
colours  dazzling  to  the  eye,  and  black  plug  tobacco  went  far 
to  break  down  their  reserve.  Whilst  we  lunched  on  sea 
biscuit  and  tea,  waiting  for  the  hunters  to  return,  one  comely 
girl — whaler-trained  I could  see  from  the  spoons,  an  alarm- 
clock  bell,  and  big  Canadian  pennies  that  dangled  on  the 
heel-long  tail  of  her  kooletah — brought  forth  an  old  accor- 
dion, which,  bearing  the  hand-painted  label,  “Forget-me- 
not,”  was  evidently  the  gift  of  some  affectionate  whaler  lad. 
She  began  diffidently  enough  at  first  to  play.  It  was  not 
long,  however,  before  she  was  tearing  off  “The  Campbells 
are  Coming,”  hornpipes,  and  the  devil’s  reel,  and  Gushue, 
the  mate,  in  his  Newfoundland  knee-boots  of  cowhide,  was 
“a-shakin’  ’em  down”  on  a granite  ledge.  In  the  midst  of 
it  the  hunters  returned.  Their  eyes  sparkled  at  the  prospect 
of  a ship,  with  its  treasure-trove  of  tobacco,  sweets,  guns, 
and  tea,  come  amongst  them. 

“Yes,”  said  their  spokesman,  the  oldest,  “where  you  are 
now  is  the  mouth  of  Amadjuak  Bay.  At  the  head  of  the 
bay  two  small  rivers  flow  into  the  sea,  and  even  now  there 
are  Eskimos  there,  and  the  camps  of  half-a-hundred  more” — 
he  counted  with  the  fingers  of  his  hand— “are  less  than  a 
day’s  kayaking  away.”  They  smiled  from  ear  to  ear  when 
we  told  them  of  the  big  igloo  aboard  the  ship,  which  we  were 
to  put  together  and  live  in  for  a year. 

They  were  in  their  kayaks  waiting  at  noon  the  following 
day  when  the  Laddie^  her  flags  flying,  pulled  out  from  the 
island  mask  toward  them.  All  of  them — their  women, 
babies,  and  children,  their  dogs  and  tents  and  gear — were 


FILMS 


I2I 


soon  aboard.  The  cook  plied  them  with  sea  biscuit,  lard, 
and  tea,  and  the  gramophone  above  the  rattle  and  clangour 
of  the  engine  and  the  tumult  of  their  and  their  dogs’  voices, 
poured  out  minstrel  and  Harry  Lauder  songs  as  the  Laddie^ 
with  as  closely  packed  and  happy  a throng  as  any  Coney 
Island  boat  ever  carried,  sailed  toward  the  head  of  Amadjuak 
Bay. 

On  the  northwest  corner  of  the  half-round,  rugged  head 
of  Amadjuak  Bay,  we  located,  for  here  was  not  only  har- 
bourage, but  a small  river  tumbling  with  much  fuss  and 
pother  over  a half-mile  rapid  to  sea— fresh  water  for  our 
film-developing  the  winter  through.  “There  are  Hearne 
salmon  here,”  said  one  old  Eskimo,  “when  spawning  time 
begins  in  spring;  and  up  beyond  the  rapids  lies  a little  chain 
of  lakes  which  leads  to  the  great  deer  country  in  the  interior.” 

With  a will  the  Eskimos  helped  us  unload.  For  three  days 
an  endless  chain  of  them  plied  the  ship’s  dories,  and  their 
own  kayaks  catamaraned  between  ship  and  shore;  while  the 
women,  old  men,  and  children  lugged  and  rolled  and  shoul- 
dered the  burdens  up  over  the  slopes  of  rock. 

Within  a week  the  Laddie  s work  was  done,  and  out  over 
the  harbour’s  face  she  sailed  for  Newfoundland. 

There  was  skin  ice  over  the  harbour  on  several  snapping 
clear  days  before  September  closed;  then  open  water  again 
through  the  bluff  and  bluster  of  October,  which  month  ended 
with  such  a drifter  that  our  launch,  anchored  bow  and  stern 
just  offshore,  sank  to  the  bottom  under  the  weight  and  drive 
of  snow.  By  mid-November  winter  had  settled  down,  and 
the  hut,  snow-walled,  was  made  snug  and  warm.  I chose  the 
families  who  were  to  live  the  winter  through  in  their  igloos 


122 


MY  ESKIMO  FRIENDS 


around  us — one  Yew,  of  long  experience  with  whalers;  one 
Noahasweetow;  his  son  Annunglung;  one  “Jack  Johnson”; 
three  half-grown  boys,  four  wives,  one  old  grandmother, 
and  a flock  of  children. 

Until  February  we  made  no  film,  for  there  were  long 
sledge  trips  to  make  east  and  west  along  the  coast.  During 
the  memorable  days  when  we  were  in  the  hut  there  was  much 
to  do.  The  evenings  through  there  were  always  guests 
from  the  igloos  around,  come  to  smoke  a pipe,  to  gossip 
about  their  hunting,  to  listen  to  “the  little  box  that  makes 
the  fine  noise”;  but  most  of  all  to  watch  our  games  of  bil- 
liards which  we  played  on  a diminutive  quarter-size  table, 
under  the  yellow  light  of  smoky  lamps  and  rows  of  flickering 
candles,  ejaculating  their  “ayee’s”  and  “ah’s”  and  holding 
their  breath  while  some  cue  ball  slowly  rolled  its  fateful 
course. 

To  our  Christmas  feast  Eskimos  sledged  in  from  camps 
two  days  away — from  Fair  Ness,  from  the  Isle  of  God’s 
Mercy,  Chorkback,  and  Markham  Bay.  While  outfitting 
in  Newfoundland,  two  of  the  men  had  been  deputed  to  make 
up  a feast  and  pack  it  in  a special  box  marked  “Christmas,” 
keeping  the  contents  a secret.  Much  too  slowly  December 
dragged  on,  and  we  decreed  that  the  twenty-fifth  of  Decem- 
ber was  a mere  figure  of  speech.  We  elected  the  fifteenth  as 
the  gladsome  day. 

The  billiard  table,  covered  with  canvas,  was  our  festive 
board.  The  Eskimos  dined  on  less  delectable  but  bulkier 
fare  in  the  overcrowded  kitchen  just  beyond.  Noahaswee- 
tow’s  and  Annunglung’s  wives,  uniformed  in  two  old  pairs 
of  pajamas  over  their  clothes  of  deerskin,  served  the  table. 


FILMS 


12-3 


“Jack  Johnson”  manned  the  phonograph  the  while.  It 
was  midnight  when  they  all  filed  out,  varicoloured  paper  hats 
from  Tom  Thumb  crackers  cocked  on  their  happy  heads. 

February  came,  cold  but  glowingly  clear  and  calm.  Then 
we  began  our  films.  We  did  not  want  for  cooperation. 
The  women  vied  with  one  another  to  be  starred.  Igloo 
building,  conjuring  dances,  sledging,  and  seal-hunting  were 
run  off  as  the  sunlit  days  of  February  and  March  wore  on. 
Of  course  there  was  occasional  bickering,  but  only  among 
the  women — ^jealousy,  usually,  of  what  they  thought  was  the 
over-prominence  of  some  rival  in  the  film.  One  young 
mother,  whom,  with  her  baby,  I was  in  the  midst  of  filming 
one  clear  day,  suddenly  got  up,  and  despite  my  threats  and 
pleas,  walked  away.  Neither  she  nor  her  husband  had  been 
up  to  snuff  of  late,  so  I decided  to  send  them  away.  “ Don’t 
care,”  said  she,  when  in  the  most  impressive  way  we  an- 
nounced her  fate,  “seals  are  the  best  food  anyway.”  But 
old  Yew,  ever  father  of  his  flock,  interposed,  and  what  was 
finally  picked  out  from  the  crazy-quilt  of  his  pidgin  English 
was  that  she  was  not  altogether  wrong.  Two  times  in  as 
many  days  I had  given  Luliakame’s  (her  rival’s)  baby  candy, 
but  I “no  see  him  hers.” 

With  April  came  longer  and  warmer  days;  some  days  so 
warm  that  even  on  the  sledges  we  fell  asleep,  while  the  dogs 
wandered  where  and  how  they  willed.  By  the  end  of  May 
sledge  expeditions  far  afield — along  the  coast  up  into  the 
mouth  of  Fox  Channel  in  the  west,  distant  some  170  miles; 
and  east  1 50  miles  to  Lake  Harbour — had  been  accomplished. 
June  came  in  with  daylight  the  twenty-four  hours  long. 
Hunters  came  sledging  in  from  the  interior,  bringing  tales  of 


124 


MY  ESKIMO  FRIENDS 


deer  evierywhere.  No  a has  wee  tow  and  Annunglung,  know- 
ing that  I was  planning  a deer-hunting  film,  came  in  one 
day  from  a two-sleeps’  journey  northward,  bringing  lashed 
on  their  sledge  a live  year-old  deer,  which,  they  explained, 
they  had  slightly  wounded  and  captured  by  running  down. 
Their  gift  proved  embarrassing,  for  what  with  so  many  dogs 
at  large,  we  had  to  keep  it  for  three  disturbing  nights  in  a 
place  of  security,  which  was  none  other  than  our  kitchen. 

On  the  tenth  of  June  I prepared  for  our  long-planned  deer- 
filming expedition,  and  on  the  following  day,  with  camera 
and  retorts  of  film  and  food  for  twenty  days,  Annunglung 
and  I left  for  the  deer  grounds  of  the  interior.  Through 
those  long  June  days  we  travelled  far.  The  thick  yellow 
sun,  hanging  low  in  the  northern  sky  for  all  the  hours  save 
the  two  at  midnight,  seemed  to  roll  along  the  blue  masses  of 
the  far-off  hills.  Deer  were  everywhere,  pawing  up  the 
mosses  deep  in  the  valleys,  or  in  long  bands  winding  funere- 
ally across  the  white  surfaces  of  little  lakes  and  ponds.  In 
three  days  we  had  climbed  to  the  summit,  a wind-swept 
boulder  plain,  of  the  height  of  land — the  divide  of  the  waters 
flowing  south  into  Hudson  Strait,  and  north  through  un- 
known Lake  Amadjuak.  Behind  us  lay  the  welter  of 
wrinkled  hills  through  which  we  had  come;  before  us  a void 
of  plain. 

We  were  picking  out  a course  when  Annunglung  pointed 
to  what  seemed  to  be  so  many  boulders  in  a valley  far  below. 
The  boulders  moved.  “Tooktoo!”  Annunglung  whis- 
pered. We  mounted  camera  and  tripod  on  the  sledge. 
Dragging  his  six-fathom  whip  ready  to  cow  the  dogs  before 
they  gave  tongue,  Annunglung  went  on  before  the  team. 


FILMS 


125 


We  swung  in  behind  the  shoulder  of  an  intervening  hill. 
When  we  rounded  it  we  were  almost  among  them.  The  team 
lunged.  The  deer,  all  but  three,  galloped  to  right  and  left 
up  the  slope.  Three  kept  to  the  valley.  On  we  sped,  the 
camera  rocking  like  the  mast  of  a ship  at  sea.  From  the 
galloping  dogs  to  the  deer  not  two  hundred  feet  beyond, 
I filmed  and  filmed  and  filmed.  Yard  by  yard  we  began 
closing  in.  The  dogs,  sure  of  victory,  gave  tongue.  Then 
something  happened.  I am  not  altogether  clear  as  to  how  it 
happened.  All  that  I know  is  that  I fell  headlong  into  a 
deep  drift  of  snow.  The  sledge  was  belly-up,  and  across  the 
traces  of  the  bitterly  disappointed  team  Annunglung  was 
doubled  up  with  laughter. 

Within  two  days  we  swung  back  for  camp,  jubilant  over 
what  I was  sure  was  the  film  of  films.  But  within  twelve 
miles  of  the  journey’s  end,  crossing  the  rotten  ice  of  a stream, 
the  sledge  broke  through.  Exit  film. 

On  the  twenty-third  of  August  we  saw  the  last  of  good  old 
Yew,  Annunglung,  Noahasweetow,  “Jack  Johnson,”  and 
their  wives  and  babies  and  children,  and  the  hills  of  Baffin 
Land  sank  slowly  into  the  sea. 


II 


OF  OUR  adventures  after  leaving  Baffin  Land,  among 
the  Belcher  Islands  and  down  the  coasts  of  Hudson 
and  James  bays,  I have  already  told.  I left  the 
Laddie  to  be  berthed  for  the  winter  at  Moose  Factory,  and 
the  film,  along  with  the  specimens,  maps,  and  notes,  went 
with  me  by  canoe  up  the  Moose  and  the  Mattagami  to  the 
“line.”  The  film,  during  my  winter  in  lower  Canada,  was 
edited  and  put  in  form.  It  was  too  crude  to  be  interesting. 
But  I was  to  go  north  again  in  the  spring — this  time  to  ex- 
plore and  winter  on  the  Belcher  Islands.  I determined  to 
attempt  a better  one. 

Through  the  winter  on  the  Belchers  there  was  much  in  the 
way  of  exploration  to  be  done,  but  from  late  February  on, 
whenever  there  were  good  days,  I worked  at  remaking  and 
building  up  the  film  I had  begun  in  Baffin  Land.  In  the  long 
evenings  around  the  hut’s  crackling  stove  my  Eskimos  and 
I talked  and  speculated  as  to  what  scenes  could  be  made. 
Said  Wetalltok  one  night : “Why  not,  when  the  ice  breaks  in 
spring,  make  the  aggie  [picture]  of  the  big  iviuk  [walrus]? 
There  are  small  sea-swept  islands  some  three  sleeps  north  of 
here  where  the  iviuk  live.  I know,  for  I have  killed  them 
there.  Twenty  I killed  and  flensed  during  one  short  day.” 

“The  walrus  is  bad  when  he  is  angry,”  Wetalltok  con- 
tinued. “That  same  summer  one  Eskimo  went  out  from 
shore  with  his  kayak  to  hunt  ducks.  Though  early  in  the 

126 


FILMS 


127 


morning  there  had  been  a walrus  kill,  there  were  no  signs  of 
walrus  then.  He  did  not  come  back.  All  that  the  people 
could  find  were  pieces  of  kayak.  The  water  was  red,  red, 
red. 

“And  you  have  heard  of  that  kablunak  [a  member  of  the 
Northwest  Mounted  Police  at  Cape  Fullerton].  Their 
whaleboat  was  strong  and  big,  but  the  walrus  they  had 
wounded  with  their  gun  but  did  not  kill  swam  under  the  boat 
and  up  over  the  side.  With  his  tusks  he  turned  it  over. 
Two  of  the  kablunak  swam  in  to  shore,  which  was  near,  but 
the  other  one  was  frightened.  He  swam  out.  The  two 
kablunak  who  got  out  on  shore  saw  the  walrus  charge  the 
kablunak  who  was  swimming.  The  walrus  kept  on  charging 
him,  even  after  he  was  dead.  Then  he  went  for  the  boat 
and  smashed  it  to  pieces  with  his  tusks.  And  then  he  charged 
the  pieces  which  floated  on  the  sea. 

“To  come  upon  the  walrus  sleeping  upon  the  shore  will  be 
the  surest  way  to  make  the  aggie.  I will  crawl  in  among 
them  and  throw  my  harpoon.  Quick  they  will  all  roll  into 
the  sea.  Then  will  come  the  fight.  It  will  take  all  of  us  to 
hold  him  with  the  line  of  my  harpoon.  You  will  see  his 
mates  close  around  him.  They  will  all  be  very,  very  angry.” 
Such  was  the  beginning  of  the  iviuk  aggie. 

When  June  came  we  were  ready  and  waiting  to  begin  the 
trip.  Salty  Bill  had  long  since  had  the  Nastapoka  rigged  and 
painted  and  waiting  to  slide  into  the  sea  the  moment  the  ice 
cleared  away. 

On  the  seventeenth  the  break-up  came,  and  within  the 
day  the  Nastapoka  was  launched,  loaded,  and  under  way. 
On  the  last  of  June  we  cleared  from  the  last  north  of  the  Bel- 


128 


MY  ESKIMO  FRIENDS 


cher  Islands.  At  sundown  we  picked  up  a bit  of  land,  a 
boulder-covered  waste  not  much  more  than  a ship’s  length 
long.  The  reader  will  remember  how,  attracted  by  the 
swarms  of  sea  pigeons  that  as  thick  as  flies  flew  up  over  the 
island,  we  ventured  too  near,  and  before  we  knew  what  had 
happened,  the  Nastapoka^  sagging  in  a big  ground-swell, 
struck  and  began  pounding  to  pieces  on  the  rocks.  He  will 
remember,  too,  the  three  long  weeks  we  spent  there,  and 
how,  with  nothing  but  a few  pieces  of  driftwood.  Salty  Bill 
made  a Spanish  winch  and  worked  thtNastapoka  in  to  shore; 
and  how,  with  bits  of  board  and  canvas,  though  she  had 
holes  in  her  through  which  one  could  crawl.  Salty  finally 
fixed  her  up  again.  During  these  dragging  days  there  was 
little  my  Eskimos  or  I could  do;  so  when  Mukpollo  proposed 
that  in  our  small  open  boat  and  his  kayak  we  continue  on 
northward  to  the  iviuk  islands,  I decided  to  make  the  at- 
tempt, forlorn  though  it  seemed  to  be,  since  it  would  be  our 
one  last  chance  to  make  the  film  we  had  planned  and  waited 
for  so  long.  Our  boat,  sixteen  feet  long,  and  the  kayak,  we 
would  catamaran  if  we  came  upon  rough  weather. 

What  few  islands  lay  along  the  way  were  small — the  larg- 
est less  than  a mile  across.  All  of  them  were  surf-bound,  and 
the  distance  between  the  small  pinpoints  some  of  them  ap- 
peared to  be  was  often  more  than  ten  miles.  Luck  was 
with  us,  however,  for  in  the  jumps  we  made  from  one  to  an- 
other we  had  always  smooth  seas.  We  had  put  in  a long 
day’s  travelling  and  the  sun  was  low  down  in  the  west,  when 
Mukpollo,  pointing  northward  to  the  smallest  island  speck  of 
all,  said:  “There  is  the  last  of  the  islands;  I hope  there  are 
walrus  there.”  We  drew  near,  scanning  every  inch  of  shore- 


FILMS 


129 


line;  but  the  patch  of  tawn  which  we  knew  would  mean  a 
sleeping  herd  was  nowhere  to  be  seen.  That  they  might  be 
on  the  island’s  far  shore  was  our  one  last  hope.  We  looked 
about  for  a landing  through  the  surf.  Just  beyond  the  shoul- 
der of  a little  cove,  “Iviuk!  Iviuk!”  called  Mukpollo,  and 
sure  enough,  on  the  gleaming  black  surf-worn  rocks  lay  a 
great  herd  sprawled  out  asleep. 

Down  wind  we  went,  careful  as  to  muffled  oars,  and  landed 
waist-deep  in  the  surf.  Mukpollo  went  off  alone  toward 
the  sleeping  herd;  he  returned,  saying  that  they  were  undis- 
turbed. However,  it  was  much  too  dark  for  pictures;  we 
would  have  to  wait  until  morning.  “Yes,”  said  Mukpollo, 
in  answer  to  my  fears,  “if  the  wind  holds  in  the  same  quarter 
they  will  not  get  our  scent.”  Not  daring  to  build  a drift- 
wood fire,  we  made  out  our  evening  meal  on  raw  bacon,  sea 
biscuit,  and  cold  water. 

As  luck  would  have  it,  the  wind  did  hold.  With  harpoon 
set  and  a stout  seal  line  carefully  coiled,  and  my  motion 
picture  camera  and  film  retorts  in  hand,  off  we  crawled  for 
the  walrus  ground.  The  herd  lay  sleeping — twenty  great 
hulks  guarded  by  two  big  bulls.  At  about  minute  intervals 
they  raised  their  heads  over  the  snoring  and  swinishly  grunt- 
ing herd  and  slowly  looked  around,  then  sank  to  sleep  again. 
Slowly  I snaked  up  to  the  sheltering  screen  of  a big  boulder, 
and  Mukpollo,  the  end  of  his  harpoon  line  lashed  around  the 
boulder,  snaked  more  slowly  still  out  toward  them.  Once 
in  the  open  he  could  move  only  when  the  sentinels  dropped 
their  heads  in  sleep.  Hours  it  seemed;  but  finally  he  had 
crawled  close  in.  The  sentinels  became  suspicious  and 
stupidly  stared  toward  him.  Slowly  they  turned  their 


130 


MY  ESKIMO  FRIENDS 


slobbering  heads  to  and  fro;  Mukpollo  swung  his  own  head 
in  lugubrious  unison.  They  rolled  on  their  sides  to  scratch 
themselves;  Mukpollo  as  grotesquely  did  likewise.  Finally 
the  sentinels  seemed  satisfied;  their  heads  dropped  in  sleep 
once  more.  Now  only  a dozen  feet  intervened;  quickly 
Mukpollo  closed  in.  As  I signalled  he  rose  upon  his  feet,  and 
with  his  harpoon  held  high,  like  lightning  he  struck  down  at 
the  nearest  bull.  A bellow  and  a roar,  and  twenty  great 
walrus  rolled  with  incredible  speed  down  the  wave-washed 
slope  of  rocks  to  sea. 

“The  line!  The  line!”  cried  Mukpollo,  “watch  the  line!” 
— which  was  twanging  in  the  air  like  a fiddle  string.  But 
even  as  he  called  it  snapped  in  two,  and  the  bull  he  had 
stalked  so  patiently  dived  and  made  away.  Followed  a 
furious  churn  of  water,  and  heads  with  black  beady  eyes  and 
long,  wicked  tusks  shot  up,  their  battle-cry  resounding. 
The  wounded  bull  threshing  the  sea  in  his  rage  and  fury,  the 
herd  around  him  charging — I filmed  and  filmed,  until  the 
last  inch  was  ground  away. 

In  two  days  we  were  back  again  to  where  Bill  and  the  half- 
breed  were  working  on  the  still  much-bruised  and  battered 
Nastapoka. 

But,  confident  now  of  our  ability  to  hop,  skip,  and  jump 
between  the  islands,  I decided  to  go  on  with  Mukpollo  to  the 
base.  Came  a two  days’  gale,  but  the  morning  of  the  third 
day  broke  clear,  and  though  the  swells  still  ran  long  and  high 
there  was  little  wind.  Off  we  struck  for  the  next  island,  some 
fifteen  miles  south.  The  speck  of  it  we  could  barely  make 
out,  for  the  swells  ran  higher  than  our  boat  was  long. 

The  day  was  done  before  the  boom  of  the  surf  rang  in  our 


FILMS 


131 

ears.  Overnight  came  heavy  wind,  and  for  two  days  we 
waited  for  the  sea  to  calm  down.  When  again  we  launched 
out,  what  wind  there  was  followed  us.  So  we  sailed,  cover- 
ing in  an  hour  what  would  have  taken  thrice  that  time  by 
paddle.  By  night  we  had  reached  the  last  island  of  the 
chain.  But  one  more  gap,  some  twelve  miles,  lay  between 
us  and  home.  Bowling  on  with  the  bone  in  our  teeth,  we 
closed  in  to  the  sea-swept  shore,  looking  for  a landing. 
What  beach  there  was  gave  way  to  a short  line  of  cliffs. 
Beyond  them  we  hoped  to  find  a cove. 

Of  a sudden  the  blanket  we  had  for  sail  began  threshing  in 
a squall  of  wind.  Before  we  could  haul  in  sail  we  were 
caught  in  the  undertow.  With  the  film  retorts  of  the  iviuk 
aggie  Mukpollo  sprang  clear.  Omarolluk  grabbed  his  har- 
poon and  my  gun,  and  I followed  with  the  cameras.  The 
kayak  came  out  of  it  unhurt,  but  the  open  boat  was  no  more. 
Only  her  ribs  remained. 

Followed  two  days  of  wind  and  driving  rain.  What  food 
we  had  was  sea  biscuit  and  water,  and  shelter,  the  lee  of 
boulders.  “The  best  thing  now,”  said  Mukpollo,  “is  for 
Tookalook  to  crawl  inside  my  kayak  and  I will  paddle  down 
to  your  big  igloo  and  return  with  the  kayak  and  your  old 
canoe.” 

Came  wind  and  rain.  For  two  days  I stayed  within  the 
boulder  shelter.  The  wind  became  almost  a gale  and  the 
seas  drove  high.  As  the  murk  of  night  crept  through  the 
storm,  thought  I,  “There’s  going  to  be  another  day  of  it.” 
And  then  above  the  din  of  wind  and  rain  and  sea  came  what 
sounded  like  a faint  “Chimo-0-0.”  Mechanically  I looked 
out.  With  unbelieving  eyes,  I made  out  two  men  in  my  old 


132 


MY  ESKIMO  FRIENDS 


canoe — Tookalook,  steering  in  the  stern;  and  Mukpollo, 
bailing  with  a pail.  They  had  a piece  of  blanket  for  sail 
with  which  to  carry  on.  Mukpollo’s  kayak,  catamaraned, 
was  all  that  kept  them  from  swamping  as  they  sprang  up 
from  nowhere  to  the  crests  of  sprawling  seas. 

The  day  following  we  were  home  once  more.  Another 
day  and  I had  developed  the  “iviuk  aggie”;  and  that  evening 
with  Tookalook  and  Mukpollo  looking  on,  I unrolled  it  be- 
fore the  lamplight.  Every  scene  was  there. 

The  reader  will  remember  our  difficulties  with  the  Laddie 
— how  she  had  to  be  abandoned  during  the  winter  and  used 
up,  piece  by  piece,  for  fuel.  The  only  craft  remaining  in 
which  we  could  make  the  five  hundred  miles  down  through 
the  open  bay  to  the  mouth  of  the  Moose  River  was  the  little 
thirty-six-foot  Nastapoka.  Bruised  and  battered  as  she  was. 
Bill,  as  soon  as  he  got  her  down  to  the  base,  pulled  her  up 
and  overhauled  her,  declaring  that,  gales  or  no,  she  would  do 
tor  the  big  trip  down.  Of  course,  everything  had  to  be  left 
behind  save  the  clothes  we  wore,  some  three  weeks’  food, 
notes,  maps,  specimens,  and  the  film — two  boxes  covered  by 
the  Eskimos  with  waterproofing  of  sealskin  carefully  sewn. 

On  the  thirteenth  of  September  we  climbed  aboard.  The 
following  morning  we  were  fifty  miles  on  and  the  last  outlier 
of  the  Belchers  disappeared.  Then  for  three  days  September 
gales  blew  head  on,  and  with  all  James  Bay  for  sea  room  the 
Nastapoka^  with  mainsail  reefed  and  rudder  lashed,  hove  to. 
When  the  gale  blew  out,  from  island  to  island  we  kept  on, 
standing  behind  them  when  the  winds  were  against  us;  then 
on  again  with  each  good  slant.  It  was  two  weeks  before  we 
reached  the  south  end  of  the  Bay. 


FILMS 


133 


On  the  first  of  October  we  left  the  little  Nastapoka  snugged 
up  in  the  placid  cove  at  “Moose.”  In  two  weeks  more  we 
saw  the  last  of  rapids,  long  bends,  and  portages.  We  “struck 
the  line.”  The  film  was  safe  and  sound.  And  then  came 
the  end — while  putting  it  in  form,  from  nothing  more  for- 
midable than  my  cigarette,  the  last  inch  of  it  went  up  in 
smoke ! 

To  make  a long  story  short,  I could  not  forget  the  film;  I 
decided  to  go  north  again,  this  time  wholly  for  the  purpose 
of  picturing  the  people  I had  come  to  like  so  well.  Mr.  John 
Revillon  and  Captain  Thierry  Mallet,  of  Revillon  Freres,  un- 
dertook to  finance  the  project.  Their  fur  post  at  Cape 
Dufferin,  on  northeastern  Hudson  Bay,  was  to  be  the  nucleus 
for  my  work. 

On  the  fifteenth  of  August  we  let  go  anchor  in  the  mouth 
of  the  Innusuk  River,  and  the  five  gaunt  and  melancholy- 
looking buildings  which  make  up  the  post  stood  out  on  a 
boulder-ridden  slope  less  than  half  a mile  a way. 

Of  the  Eskimos  who  were  known  to  the  post,  a dozen  all 
told  were  selected  for  the  film.  Of  these  Nanook,  a charac- 
ter famous  in  the  country,  I chose  as  my  chief  man.  Be- 
sides him,  and  much  to  his  approval,  I took  on  three  younger 
men  as  helpers.  This  also  meant  their  wives  and  families, 
dogs  to  the  number  of  twenty-five,  sledges,  kayaks,  and 
hunting  impedimenta. 

As  luck  would  have  it,  the  first  film  to  be  made  was  that  of 
a walrus  hunt.  From  Nanook  I heard  of  the  “Walrus  Is- 
land.” On  its  south  end,  a surf-bound  beach,  there  were  in 
summer,  he  said,  many  walrus,  judging  from  signs  that  had 
been  seen  by  a winter  sealing  crowd  of  Eskimos  who  at  one 


134 


MY  ESKIMO  FRIENDS 


time  had  been  caught  there  by  a break-up  of  the  ice.  “The 
people  do  not  go  out  to  the  island  in  summer,”  he  con- 
tinued, “for  not  only  is  it  out  of  sight  of  land,  but  it  is 
ringed  with  heavy  surf — dangerous  landing  for  kayaks. 
But  for  a long  time  I have  had  my  eyes  on  your  whaleboat,” 
said  he,  “and  I am  sure,  if  the  seas  are  smooth,  it  is  big 
enough  forcrossingover,  and  just  the  thing  for  landing.” 

Through  the  busy  weeks  that  followed,  time  and  time 
again  Nanook  reminded  me  of  the  many,  many  moons  it  was 
since  he  had  hunted  walrus.  One  morning  I woke  up  to  see 
the  profile  of  rising  ground  just  beyond  my  window  covered 
with  topeks.  Nanook  popped  his  head  in  through  the  door. 
They  were  Eskimos  from  the  north,  he  said,  far  away. 
“And  among  them,”  eagerly  he  continued,  “is  the  very  man 
who  saw  the  walrus  signs  on  Walrus  Island.” 

Nanook  was  off,  to  return  in  a moment  more  leading  the 
great  man  through  the  door.  We  talked  iviuk  through  the 
hour.  “ Suppose  we  go,”  said  I in  conclusion.  “ do  you  know 
that  you  and  your  men  may  have  to  give  up  making  a kill,  if 
it  interferes  with  my  film?  Will  you  remember  that  it  is  the 
picture  of  you  hunting  the  iviuk  that  I want,  and  not  their 
meat?” 

“Yes,  yes,  the  aggie  will  come  first,”  earnestly  he  assured 
me.  “Not  a man  will  stir,  not  a harpoon  will  be  thrown 
until  you  give  the  sign.  It  is  my  word.”  We  shook  hands 
and  agreed  to  start  next  day. 

For  three  days  we  lay  along  the  coast,  before  the  big  seas 
outside  died  down.  The  wind  began  blowing  off  the  land. 
We  broke  out  our  leg-o’-mutton.  Before  the  day  was  half 
done  a film  of  gray  far  out  in  the  west  told  us  we  were  in 


FILMS  135 

> 

sight  of  Walrus  Island.  By  nightfall  we  closed  in  to  the 
thundering  shadow  that  was  its  shore. 

For  hours  we  lounged  around  the  luxury  of  a driftwood 
fire,  soaking  in  its  warmth  and  speculating  on  our  chances 
for  the  morrow.  When  daylight  came  we  made  oflP  to  where 
the  stranger  had  told  us  he  had  found  the  walrus  signs.  It 
was  a crescent  of  beach  pounded  by  the  surf.  While  we 
looked  around,  one  after  another  the  heads  of  a school  of 
walrus,  their  wicked  tusks  gleaming  in  the  sun,  shot  up  above 
the  sea. 

By  night  all  my  stock  of  film  was  exposed.  The  whale- 
boat was  full  of  walrus  meat  and  ivory.  Nanook  never  had 
such  walrus-hunting  and  never  had  I such  filming,  as  that  on 
Walrus  Island. 

Three  days  later  the  post  bell  clangs  out  the  welcome  news 
that  the  kablunak  is  about  to  show  his  iviuk  aggie.  Men,' 
old  men,  women,  old  women,  boys,  girls,  and  small  children 
file  in  to  the  factor’s  house.  Soon  there  is  not  an  inch  of 
space  to  spare.  The  trader  turns  down  the  lamps.  The 
projector  light  shoots  over  the  shocks  of  heads  upon  the  blan- 
ket which  is  the  screen. 

Then  the  picture.  A figure  appears.  There  is  silence. 
They  do  not  understand.  “See,  it  is  Nanook!”  the  trader 
cries.  The  Nanook  in  the  flesh  laughs  his  embarrassment. 
“Ah!  ah!  ah!”  they  all  exclaim.  Then  silence.  The  figure 
moves.  The  silence  deepens.  They  cannot  understand. 
They  turn  their  heads.  They  stare  at  the  projector.  They 
stare  at  its  beam  of  magic  light.  They  stare  at  Nanook, 
the  most  surprised  of  all,  and  again  their  heads  turn  toward 
the  screen.  They  follow  the  figure  which  now  snakes  to- 


MY  ESKIMO  FRIENDS 


136 

ward  the  background.  There  is  something  in  the  back- 
ground. The  something  moves.  It  lifts  its  head.  ‘ 

“Iviuk!  iviuk!”  shakes  the  room.  The  figure  stands  up, 
harpoon  poised  in  hand. 

“Be  sure  of  your  harpoon!  be  sure  of  your  harpoon!”  the 
audience  cries. 

The  figure  strikes  down;  the  walrus  roll  off  into  the  sea. 
More  figures  rush  in;  they  grab  the  harpoon  line.  For  dear 
life  they  hold  on. 

“Hold  him!  hold  him!”  shout  the  men.  “Hold  him!  hold 
him!”  squeal  the  women.  “Hold  him!”  pipe  the  children. 

The  walrus’s  mate  dives  in,  and  by  locking  tusks  attempts 
rescue. 

“Hold  him!”  gasps  the  crowd. 

Nanook  and  his  crew,  although  their  arms  seem  to  be 
breaking,  hold  on.  But  slowly  and  surely  the  threshing 
walrus  drags  the  figures  nearer  sea. 

“ Hold  him ! hold  him ! ” they  despair.  They  are  breathing 
hard.  “Dig  in!  dig  in!”  they  rasp,  as  Nanook’s  feet  slip 
another  inch  through  the  sand. 

Deep  silence.  Suddenly  the  line  sags,  the  crew,  like  a flash, 
draw  in  the  slack,  and  inch  by  inch  the  walrus  is  pulled  in  to 
shore.  Bedlam  rocks  the  house. 

The  fame  of  the  film  spread  far  up  and  far  down  the  coast. 
Every  strange  Eskimo  that  came  into  the  post  Nanook 
brought  before  me  and  begged  that  he  be  shown  the  iviuk 
aggie. 


Ill 


Thirty  or  more  years  ago  the  interior  of  northern 
Ungava  teemed  with  bands  of  barren-ground  cari- 
bou. They  numbered  thousands.  Now,  however, 
there  are  only  a few  straggling  bands.  A caribou  kill  of  even 
half-a-dozen  after  a long  summer’s  trip  into  the  interior  is  an 
event  among  the  Eskimos.  Skins  for  clothing  consequently 
are  rare.  The  Cape  Dufferin  people  are  the  poorest  clad  I 
have  ever  seen.  The  clothing  of  Nanook  and  his  crew  was 
no  exception,  so  I cast  around  for  means  of  getting  skins  with 
which  to  make  new  and  better  costumes.  No  skins  were  to 
be  had.  Those  few  fortunates  who  had  new  deerskin  cloth- 
ing refused  to  let  it  go  for  anything  I might  have  in  exchange. 
I did  secure  for  my  own  wear  a much-worn  kooletah  (hooded 
coat)  and  an  old  pair  of  deerskin  trousers,  but  the  present  in 
exchange  was  a brand-new  Winchester  and  two  hundred 
cartridges. 

Along  about  freeze-up  time,  one  Nevalingha  came  into  the 
post  to  trade.  Nanook  let  me  know  that  he  and  his  hunting 
companion  had  made  a deer  kill  in  the  far  interior  during  the 
summer — so  far,  however,  from  the  coast,  that  they  had  had 
to  cache  the  skins  and  horns,  expecting  to  bring  them  down 
by  sledge  in  winter.  I approached  Nevalingha  in  the  hope 
of  securing  the  skins,  but  he  explained  that  all  of  them  were 
promised,  some  to  his  father,  some  to  his  friends,  some  to  his 
brother,  and  so  on.  He  couldn’t  break  his  promises,  and  at 


137 


138 


MY  ESKIMO  FRIENDS 


any  rate  they  all  needed  them  badly.  As  well  did  I need 
them,  and  I made  extravagant  bids,  but  all  that  I had,  said 
he,  could  not  compensate  for  the  lack  of  warm  winter  cloth- 
ing. Elowever,  those  to  whom  he  was  to  have  given  skins 
were  prevailed  upon  to  release  him  from  his  promises.  I 
was  to  give  him  food  and  ammunition  and  walrus  meat  for 
his  dogs,  and  upon  his  return  with  the  skins  was  to  pay  him 
as  much  as  if  they  were  all  white  foxes.  Nevalingha,  the 
ne’er-do-well,  became  prospectively  a rich  man.  He  had 
never  stood  high  in  the  factor’s  favour — “hell  for  eatin’  and 
not  much  for  foxes,”  the  latter  said.  He  and  his  companions 
were  gone  three  weeks  into  a country  in  which  the  Eskimos 
had  never  hunted  foxes  before.  They  returned  with  not 
only  the  twenty-two  deerskins,  but  to  the  amazement  of  the 
factor,  with  the  prime  pelts  of  forty-three  foxes — to  an  Es- 
kimo a fabulous  fortune. 

When  in  December  the  snow  lay  heavy  on  the  ground 
Nanook  and  his  men  abandoned  their  topeks  of  sealskin  and 
a village  of  snow  igloos  sprung  up  around  my  wintering  post. 
They  snow-walled  my  little  hut  to  the  eaves  with  thick 
blocks  of  snow.  My  kitchen  was  their  rendezvous — there 
was  always  a five-gallon  pail  of  tea  steeping  on  the  stove  and 
sea  biscuit  in  the  barrel.  My  little  gramophone,  too,  was 
common  property.  Caruso,  Farrar,  Riccardo,  Martin, 
McCormack,  served  their  turns  with  Harry  Lauder,  A1 
Jolson,  and  Jazz  King  orchestras.  Caruso  in  the  Pagliacci 
prologue  with  its  tragic  ending  was  to  them  the  most  comic 
record  of  the  lot.  Nanook  shook  with  laughter;  the  children 
rolled  with  merriment  on  the  floor. 

Nanook  was  always  busy  at  some  work  or  other,  con- 


THE  BARREN  LANDS 


FILMS 


139 


stantly  on  the  lookout  to  barter  for  game  if  some  hunting 
team  came  in,  to  inquire  into  every  strange  hunting  ex- 
perience which  might  at  some  time  in  future  serve  for  the 
kablunak’s  aggie;  to  see  that  the  stoves  kept  drawing;  to 
keep  the  drift  from  clogging  up  my  cabin  windows.  On  days 
when  there  was  film  developing  he,  “Harry  Lauder,”  their 
wives  and  children  shuttled  from  the  cabin  to  the  waterhole, 
with  dogs  and  sledge  hauling  water  for  the  kablunak’s 
thirsty  coils  of  film — two  ice-clogged  barrels  at  a time. 

One  of  Nanook’s  problems  was  to  construct  an  igloo  large 
enough  for  the  filming  of  interior  scenes.  The  average 
Eskimo  igloo,  about  twelve  feet  in  diameter,  was  much  too 
small.  On  the  dimensions  I laid  out  for  him,  a diameter  of 
twenty-five  feet,  Nanook  and  his  companions  started  in  to 
build  the  biggest  igloo  of  their  lives.  For  two  days  they 
worked,  the  women  and  children  helping  them.  Then  came 
the  hard  part — to  cut  insets  for  five  large  slab-ice  windows 
without  weakening  the  dome.  They  had  hardly  begun  when 
the  dome  fell  in  pieces  to  the  ground.  “Never  mind,”  said 
Nanook,  “I  can  do  it  next  time.” 

For  two  days  more  they  worked,  but  again  with  the  same 
result;  as  soon  as  they  began  setting  in  the  ice  windows  their 
structure  fell  to  the  ground.  It  was  a huge  joke  this  time, 
and  holding  their  sides  they  laughed  their  misfortune  away. 
Again  Nanook  began  on  the  “big  aggie  igloo,”  but  this  time 
the  women  and  children  hauled  barrels  of  water  on  sledges 
from  the  waterhole  and  iced  the  walls  as  fast  as  they  went  up. 
Finally  the  igloo  was  finished  and  they  stood  eyeing  it  as 
satisfied  as  so  many  children  over  a house  of  blocks.  The 
light  from  the  ice  windows  proved  inadequate,  however,  and 


140 


MY  ESKIMO  FRIENDS 


when  the  interiors  were  finally  filmed  the  dome’s  half  just 
over  the  camera  had  to  be  cut  away,  so  Nanook  and  his  fam- 
ily went  to  sleep  and  awakened  with  all  the  cold  of  out-of- 
doors  pouring  in. 

To  “Harry  Lauder”  I deputed  the  care  of  my  cameras. 
Bringing  them  from  the  cold  outside  into  contact  with  the 
warm  air  of  the  base  often  frosted  them  inside  and  out,  which 
necessitated  taking  them  apart  and  carefully  drying  them 
piece  by  piece.  With  the  motion  picture  cameras  there  was 
no  difficulty,  but  with  my  Graflex  I found  to  my  sorrow  such 
a complication  of  parts  that  I could  not  get  it  together  again. 
For  several  days  its  “innards”  lay  strewn  on  my  work  table. 
“Harry  Lauder”  finally  volunteered  for  the  task  of  putting 
them  together,  and  through  a long  evening  before  a flickering 
candle  and  with  a crowd  of  Eskimos  around  ejaculating  their 
“ayee’s”  and  “ah’s,”  he  managed  to  succeed  where  I had 
failed. 

Never  shall  I forget  his  proffered  ministrations  to  an 
ulcerated  tooth.  After  witnessing  the  inadequacy  of  all  the 
resources  of  my  medicine  kit  and  the  disastrous  failure  of  an 
attempt  to  pull,  he  came  to  me,  with  a tiny  drill  which  he 
had  laboriously  fashioned  out  of  a tenpenny  nail  and 
mounted  in  a carpenter’s  brace. 

Between  Nanook  and  “Harry  Lauder”  and  myself  there 
never  was  a serious  misunderstanding.  But  that  they  should 
arise  between  myself  and  some  of  the  Eskimos  with  whom  I 
was  less  intimate  was,  I suppose,  inevitable.  They  were  due 
for  the  most  part  to  my  own  inability,  perhaps,  to  com- 
prehend exactly  what  they  meant  to  say  and  under  ordinary 
circumstances  were  soon  explained  away.  Only  once  under 


FILMS 


141 

peculiar  stress  did  misunderstanding  assume  serious  pro- 
portions. This  was  with  one  Aviuk,  on  our  return  from  an 
expedition  up  the  coast.  For  three  days  we  had  been  with- 
out oil — three  days  of  subsisting  on  cold  food  and  no  tea — 
when  we  came  to  a cache  and  a gallon  of  the  precious  fuel. 
The  following  day,  travelling  with  difficulty  in  the  face  of  a 
bitterly  cold  drifter,  we  had  halted  to  disentangle  the  snarled 
traces  of  the  team,  and  Aviuk  called  to  me  saying  that  the 
oil  was  gone — had  been  left  behind.  Only  then  did  I realize 
all  that  that  oil  meant.  I could  not  contain  myself.  “Harry 
Lauder”  and  his  companion,  scenting  trouble,  discreetly 
withdrew,  one  ahead  and  one  behind,  and  were  lost  in  a blur 
of  drift.  Aviuk  had  drawn  his  snow  knife  from  his  belt  and 
now,  brandishing  it  in  front  of  me,  was  pouring  out  a lava 
flow  in  Eskimo.  The  harpoons  lay  lashed  in  front  of  me  on 
the  sledge,  and  I was  debating  my  chances  of  seizing  one  in 
time  when  it  dawned  upon  me  that  Aviuk’s  rather  startling 
pantomime  was  not  intended  offensively.  Out  of  the  drift 
at  this  juncture  came  “Harry  Lauder”  holding  aloft  the  lost 
article — an  old  tin  can  I had  thrown  away!  The  incident 
was  closed  that  night  over  a love  feast  of  dried  apples  with 
plenty  of  sugar,  well  cooked  and  warm.  All  through  Janu- 
ary the  Eskimos  complained  of  the  hard  winter — no  seals. 
The  sea,  said  they,  was  frozen  for  miles  and  miles,  farther 
out  than  in  any  other  year  they  could  remember.  There  had 
been  a lapse  of  days  in  the  constant  winter  winds  and  the 
movement  and  the  milling  of  the  icefields  were  stilled,  and 
like  magic  seal-hunting  lanes  and  tidal  pools  were  frozen 
fast.  Until  heavy  gales  again  should  blow,  the  doors  of 
their  hunting  grounds  were  closed.  Some  spoke  of  the  long 


1 


142 


MY  ESKIMO  FRIENDS 


and  fruitless  vigils,  day  by  day  and  through  the  nights,  over 
the  breathing  holes  of  seal;  some,  without  seal  oil  for  their 
lamps,  of  the  darkness  of  the  igloos.  They  spoke  even  of  the 
madness  that  comes  from  starvation,  and  in  distress  of  mind 
sought  advice  as  to  what  they  should  do  with  a madman  who 
terrorized  and  paralyzed  the  whole  village,  threatening  the 
safety  of  women  and  children  and  keeping  the  men  from  their 
hunting.  There  were  tales  of  bear,  themselves  hungry  for 
the  seal  upon  which  they  live,  prowling  about  the  encamp- 
ments at  night.  One  old  couple  asleep  in  their  igloo  had  been 
wakened  by  the  snow  of  the  igloo  dome  falling  on  their  faces, 
to  see  by  the  feeble  lamplight  the  mask  of  a bear  sniffing  and 
growling  as  he  moved  his  head  to  and  fro — sniffing  the  good 
seal-oil  smell  of  lamp  and  clothing.  Desperately  enough  the 
old  woman  had  seized  her  trimming  stick,  lighted  it,  and 
holding  it  to  the  bear’s  nose  had  kept  the  beast  at  bay  while 
her  husband  crawled  outside  for  his  harpoon! 

The  walrus  hunting  having  proved  successful,  Nanook  as- 
pired to  bigger  game — a bear  hunt,  no  less,  at  Cape  Sir 
Thomas  Smith,  some  two  hundred  miles  northward.  “Here,” 
said  Nanook,  “is  where  the  she-bear  den  in  the  winter,  and 
it  seems  to  me  that  we  might  get  the  big,  big  aggie  there.” 

He  went  on  to  describe  how  in  early  December  the  she- 
bear  dens  in  huge  drift  banks  of  snow.  There  is  nothing  to 
mark  the  den  save  a tiny  vent,  or  airhole,  which  is  melted 
open  by  the  animal’s  body  heat.  His  companions  would 
remain  at  either  side  of  me,  rifles  in  hand,  whilst  he  with  his 
snow  knife  would  open  up  the  den,  block  by  block.  The 
dogs  in  the  meantime  would  all  be  unleashed  and  like  wolves 
circle  the  opening.  Mrs.  Bear’s  door  opened,  Nanook,  with 


FILMS 


143 


nothing  but  his  harpoon,  would  be  poised  and  waiting. 
The  dogs  baiting  the  quarry — some  of  them  with  her  light- 
ning paws  the  bear  would  send  hurtling  through  the  air;  him- 
self dancing  here  and  there — he  pantomimed  the  scene  on 
my  cabin  floor,  using  my  fiddle  bow  for  harpoon — waiting 
to  dart  in  for  a close-up  throw;  this,  he  felt  sure,  would  be  a 
big,  big  picture  (aggie  peerualluk).  I agreed  with  him. 

“With  good  going  ten  days  will  see  us  there.  Ten  days 
for  hunting  on  the  Cape,  then  ten  days  for  coming  home 
again.  But  throw  in  another  ten  days  for  bad  weather,  and 
let’s  see  [counting  on  his  fingers] — that  makes  four  times  my 
fingers — more  than  enough  to  see  us  through.” 

“All  right,”  said  I,  “we’ll  go.”  And  Nanook,  his  eyes 
shining,  went  off  to  spread  the  news. 

For  two  weeks  we  prepared.  First  of  all  Nanook  and 
“Harry  Lauder”  sledged  out  over  the  sea  ice  for  walrus  meat 
we  had  cached  under  boulders  on  the  walrus  island.  Every 
night  we  cooked  our  big  iron  pot  full  of  pork  and  beans  and 
poured  them  into  a large  sack,  which  hung  from  a hook  out 
of  doors,  to  freeze  them.  Nanook  relashed  with  tough  seal- 
skin thongs  and  smoothed  the  runners  of  his  staunchest 
sledge,  whilst  his  and  the  wives  of  his  crew  on  my  cabin 
floor  sewed  and  sewed  boots,  kooletahs,  and  dogskin  mitts, 
and  fashioned  a new  sealskin  dog  whip  six  fathoms  long. 
Most  important  of  all  were  the  bows  and  arrows  and  bear 
spears,  all  to  be  headed,  not  with  the  kablunak’s  iron,  but 
with  stones,  as  in  days  of  long  ago. 

The  day  before  the  start  four  sledges  of  Eskimos  came  in 
from  the  north,  all  of  them  complaining  of  the  hard  winter — 
no  seal.  They  told  us,  moreover,  that  from  Cape  Smith  on 


144 


MY  ESKIMO  FRIENDS 


down  to  Cape  DufFerin  no  Eskimos  remained.  All  had 
sledged  south,  for  everywhere  was  the  hunting  condition  the 
same.  With  no  Eskimos  along  the  coast  to  depend  upon 
for  dog  food,  to  get  dog  food,  said  Nanook,  when  the  supply 
on  the  sledge  was  gone,  we  must  ourselves  kill.  This  might 
mean  spending  weeks  in  hunting.  So  we  cast  around  for  an 
extra  team  and  two  men  to  come  as  a relay  part  way:  but 
though  there  were  willing  men,  no  one  had  the  dogs  to  spare. 


IV 


The  seventeenth  of  January  was  cold  enough.  I 
scratched  a peephole  through  the  frost  enamel  of  my 
window.  Sundogs,  two  faint  balls  of  brass,  flanked 
the  weak,  low-hanging  sun.  Snow  smoke  swept  the  ground, 
the  igloo  domes  near  by,  and  the  jowl  of  a distant  granite 
hill.  Before  I had  finished  my  last  scalding  mug  of  tea  there 
was  a knock  on  the  cabin  door,  and  Nanook,  brushing  the 
snow  from  his  furs,  walked  in.  He  smiled  “good  morning,” 
as  he  took  up  my  duffle-bag  and  eiderdown  and  handed 
them  out  to  be  lashed  aboard  the  sledge. 

“This  is  good  wind,”  observed  Nanook,  as  we  halted  some 
three  hours  on  to  untangle  the  traces  of  the  team.  “See  how 
it  packs  the  snow.”  Before  the  day  was  half  done  the  snow 
was  like  a pavement.  The  big  sledge  swayed  and  rocked 
with  speed.  By  nightfall  the  wild  fan  of  dogs  were  scram- 
bling like  a pack  of  wolves  up  the  slope  of  the  last  igloo  vil- 
lage on  the  coast,  miles  beyond  the  point  we  had  hoped  to 
make. 

By  daybreak  we  were  off  again,  helter-skelter  down  a 
steep  slope,  a-crash  through  the  tidal  ice,  then  off  straight 
north  through  twisting  snow-smoke  on  an  unending  sweep  of 
frozen  sea.  All  day  long  we  jogged,  our  faces  masked  by  ice, 
the  frozen  sweat  of  heavy  running.  On  some  of  the  small 
whalebacks  of  islands  which  were  strung  out  along  the  way 

HS 


146 


MY  ESKIMO  FRIENDS 


we  saw  the  empty  shells  of  igloos  of  hungry  Eskimos  who 
long  since  had  sledged  south  in  search  of  seal.  And  before 
the  day  was  done  we  picked  out  the  black  dots  of  many 
Eskimos  and  teams.  They  were  the  last  of  the  Eskimos 
from  the  north — six  sledges  bound  south  for  seal.  They 
thronged  around  the  sledge,  hungry  for  hunting  news  and 
any  crumbs  of  food  we  might  have  to  spare. 

By  nightfall  we  were  beyond  the  last  high  hill.  Ahead 
the  coast  led  off,  a thin  black  line,  not  much  higher  than  the 
monotone  of  white  through  which  it  wound.  “We  are  well 
on  the  way,”  said  Nanook,  spacing  the  post,  our  position,  and 
Cape  Smith  with  his  snow  knife  on  the  snow.  “Five  days 
and  we  will  be  there.”  By  dark  the  team,  long  since  fed, 
were  asleep,  snugged  up  in  the  snow  and  blanketed  by  the 
drift  which  ran  low  along  the  ground. 

Nanook  never  built  a better  igloo.  The  edges  of  its 
dominoes  of  snow  were  sapphires  gleaming  in  the  seal  lamp’s 
yellow  light.  Of  royal  height  and  width  was  the  sleeping 
bunk  Nanook  carved  for  me  out  of  blocks  of  snow.  Over  the 
oil  lamp  I cooked  up  a brewis  of  sea  biscuit  and  codfish  and 
stewed  dried  apples  for  the  crew.  We  went  to  sleep  on 
Nanook’s  stories  of  seal  and  fox  and  bear  hunting  on  the 
Cape. 

By  candlelight  we  gulped  breakfast,  and  at  the  first  crack 
of  dawn  crawled  out — but  what  a sight!  The  down  of  new- 
fallen  snow  lay  heavy  on  the  ground.  Not  a breath  of  wind 
moved  over  it.  The  team  moved  like  a snail.  Nanook  s 
long  whip  cracked  through  the  air. 

“ Aput  peeungatwaluk”  [bad  snow,  bad  snow],  complained 
the  men.  We  kept  far  out  on  the  smooth  ice  at  sea,  so 


© Herillon  F rere.'i 


NANOOK  THE  HARPOONER 


FILMS 


147 


Nanook  never  knew  just  where  we  were,  until  on  the  eighth 
day  at  sundown  we  sighted  on  the  hump  of  a small  island  an 
abandoned  village  of  snow  houses,  the  black  holes  of  their 
doorways  gaping  and  broken  down.  “To  this  place  we 
have  taken  ten  days,”  Nanook  glumly  said.  “With  good 
going  it  is  only  three  days  from  home.  Only  three  days 
from  home,  and  our  dog  food  almost  gone.” 

Morning  came  with  a stiff  wind  swinging  in  from  sea. 
With  every  hour  the  going  grew  harder  and  the  team  once 
more  worked  with  a semblance  of  their  old-time  speed. 
When  evening  came  on,  with  Nanook  I climbed  to  the  crest 
of  an  island,  hoping  he  would  sight  some  familiar  landmark. 
But  the  coast  was  all  the  same — a thin  black  line.  Mechani- 
cally our  eyes  followed  it  as  it  wound  off  into  the  north,  until 
suddenly  we  caught  sight  of  what  first  seemed  a wisp  of  blue- 
gray  cloud,  indefinable,  far  away.  I could  not  believe  it 
when  Nanook  said  it  was  the  Cape.  “ But  far  off,”  he  added, 
“all  of  five  days  away.”  The  evening  through  the  crew 
hunched  up  over  mending  and  I from  the  depths  of  my  eider- 
down listened  again  to  Nanook’s  adventures  on  the  Cape. 

“Three  winters  ago  on  the  Cape,”  said  Nanook,  “there 
were  many,  many  bear.  One  night  the  snarling  and  yelping 
of  the  dogs  in  the  igloo  tunnel  woke  me.  In  the  igloo,  head 
and  shoulders  through  the  door,  was  a bear.  He  had  come 
in  through  the  snow  tunnel.  Behind  him  the  dogs  were  bit- 
ing and  snapping  at  his  legs  and  haunches;  he  could  not  back 
out  and  he  could  not  come  through.  My  harpoon  and  spears 
were  outside.  I must  cut  a hole  through  the  igloo  walls;  but 
the  walls — it  was  an  old  igloo — were  almost  ice.  The  bear 


MY  ESKIMO  FRIENDS 


148 

was  growling,  showing  his  teeth — his  lips  were  all  foam.  If 
the  dogs  would  let  him  he  would  smash  down  the  door.  I 
cut  through  the  igloo  wall  and  got  my  spear.  My  family 
were  frightened.” 

Said  “Harry  Lauder”:  “Annunglung  and  his  mother 
[Annunglung’s  father  was  deadl  killed  a bear  last  winter  on 
the  Kogaluk.  Annunglung  is  only  a boy.  He  and  his 
mother  were  going  from  the  igloo  to  the  river’s  mouth  to  fish. 
They  met  a bear.  They  wanted  that  bear,  for  they  were 
hungry.  But  all  they  had  was  a bow  and  arrow.  The  dogs 
brought  the  bear  to  a stand.  Annunglung  shot  all  his  ar- 
rows, but  he  did  not  kill  the  bear.  They  had  nothing  left. 
They  wanted  the  bear,  for  they  were  very,  very  hungry. 
One  arrow  was  sticking  in  the  bear;  the  others  were  near  him 
on  the  ground.  Annunglung,  to  fool  the  bear,  jumped 
toward  his  head,  and  his  mother  ran  in.  With  one  hand  she 
grabbed  an  arrow  on  the  ground.  With  the  other  hand 
she  grabbed  the  arrow  sticking  in  the  bear.  They  killed 
the  bear.” 

“Yes,”  said  Nanook,  “on  the  island  straight  out  from 
Cape  Wolstenholme  the  kablunak’s  big  ship  that  hunts 
whales  struck  a reef  [the  Captain  Grant  disaster,  during  the 
fall  of  1911].  When  the  ship  struck  the  reef  the  kablunak 
told  the  Eskimos  who  were  aboard  to  go  ashore.  Then  the 
storm  came.  The  ship  and  the  thirty  kablunak  went  down. 
The  Eskimos  became  very  hungry.  They  had  lost  their 
weapons  and  dogs  and  kayaks  and  tents,  which  sank  with 
the  ship.  But  they  had  the  white  man’s  knife,  and  casks 
drifted  in  from  the  wreck.  Out  of  the  wood  of  the  casks,  not 
much  longer  than  my  arm  [measuring]  they  made  bows  and 


FILMS 


149 

arrows.  And  it  was  with  these  bows  and  arrows  that  they 
killed  bear  and  ate  meat  and  made  clothing.” 

Bear  prospects  on  the  Cape  interested  us  most.  All  over 
again  we  talked  of  the  “big,  big  aggie.”  Nanook  picked  up 
a hunk  of  snow.  With  a few  simple  strokes  he  carved  a 
miniature  bear.  With  it  before  him  he  made  tracings  in  the 
snow.  “The  bear  will  stick  to  the  cave,”  said  he,  “until  we 
open  it  block  by  block,  for  her  cubs  are  very  small.  [The 
cub  at  birth  is  no  larger  than  a rat.]  But  be  careful  of  the 
cave,”  said  Nanook.  “The  roof  is  thin,  not  strong,”  and 
he  wound  up  with  an  unintelligible  exclamation.  Explained 
“Harry  Lauder,”  the  post-trained:  “You  fall  in,  bear  him 
saucy.” 

We  were  breaking  camp  before  the  sun  had  cleared  the 
horizon.  The  dogs  fought  like  wolves  as  they  wedged  in 
through  the  door  of  the  igloo  we  had  just  vacated;  the  crew 
tried  vainly  by  grasping  legs  and  tails  to  drag  them  out  for 
harnessing;  Nanook,  his  arms  around  the  master  dog,  carried 
him  bodily  to  the  sledge.  I unlimbered  the  Akeley,  hoping 
to  get  a few  feet  of  it  all  on  film.  But,  to  my  dismay,  as  soon 
as  I started  grinding,  so  brittle  was  the  film  that  it  broke  into 
bits,  like  so  much  wafer  glass.  The  thermometer  read  thirty- 
seven  degrees  below.  We  were  up  against  it,  since  thirty- 
seven  below  and  more  would  be  common  in  the  weeks  to 
come.  Clearly,  unless  some  remedy  were  found,  it  would  be 
useless  to  keep  on. 

We  went  back  into  camp.  By  keeping  the  film  retorts  in 
the  igloo  I found  that  within  the  hour  they  took  on  its  tem- 
perature. The  film  regained  its  ductility.  I told  off  Na- 
nook to  bury  the  film  retorts  and  camera  in  his  deerskin  robe 


150 


MY  ESKIMO  FRIENDS 


henceforth  when  we  broke  camp  in  the  morning.  The  crew 
were  convulsed  over  what  they  called  “the  babies”  for 
which  he  had  to  care. 

Through  the  next  three  days  we  strained  our  eyes  for  an- 
other sight  of  the  Cape,  but  drift  filled  the  air.  Even  the 
coastline,  never  more  than  six  to  ten  miles  off  in  the  east,  we 
glimpsed  only  occasionally,  and  then  so  faintly  that  Nanook 
could  only  guess  at  where  we  were. 

The  first  of  February  broke  with  a drifter.  All  day  we 
toiled  slowly  on  through  big,  rough  ice.  But  by  sundown 
we  made  a landfall,  and  the  toil  and  care  of  heavy  sledging 
were  forgotten.  Nanook  pointed  to  a patch,  faint,  far-off, 
through  the  birl  of  snow.  He  was  sure  it  was  the  Cape. 
There  was  a shift  in  the  wind  and  momentarily  the  drift 
thinned  out;  but  the  patch  was  nothing  but  a small  island  no 
more  than  a mile  away.  “The  Cape  gets  farther  away,” 
complained  the  crew. 

A luckless,  glum  camp  was  our  igloo  that  night.  Nanook’s 
strong  dog  had  been  crippled  in  the  rough  ice.  To-morrow 
the  dog  food  would  be  at  an  end.  What  food  remained  for 
Nanook  and  his  crew  was  a share  of  mine — poor  substitute 
for  seal.  There  were  no  stories  about  the  Cape,  and  as  to 
where  we  were  Nanook  refused  to  answer. 

All  through  the  next  day  Nanook  and  the  crew  walked  far 
out  on  the  sea  ice,  hunting  seal.  When  evening  came  I 
watched  the  black  specks  of  them  return.  “No  seals,”  said 
Nanook,  as  he  crawled  through  the  snow  tunnel  into  camp; 
“and,”  he  went  on  to  relate,  shaking  the  snow  dust  from  his 
furs,  “I  waited  over  one  hole  all  day.”  I told  him  it  was  not 
the  kind  of  hunting  I should  care  to  do.  Said  he,  “I  have 


^OLVAY  PUBLIC  LIBRARY 


FILMS 


151 

waited  three  days  for  a seal.  And,”  he  concluded  simply, 
“the  seal  never  came.  But  wait  till  we  get  to  the  Cape,” 
hopefully  he  went  on.  “Nowhere  can  one  find  a better  place 
for  seal.  There  never  was  such  hunting  ground.” 

For  two  days  snow  smoke  filled  the  air.  Then  the  wind 
broke.  By  igloo  time  the  gray  pall  which  so  long  had  over- 
spread the  sky  gave  way  to  a glowing  ground  of  blue.  We 
climbed  a near-by  mound  of  ice.  From  the  big  disk  of  sun, 
half-sunken  in  the  sea,  we  watched  a flood  of  amber  creep 
over  the  wilderness  of  ice  and  snow,  over  spires  and  pinnacles, 
the  emeralds  of  miles  and  miles  of  rough  icefields.  Banks  of 
mists  hung  like  curtains  in  the  north.  “Behind  them,”  said 
Nanook,  “lies  the  Cape.”  But  of  the  Cape  there  was  no 
sign.  The  sun’s  upper  rim  was  almost  level  with  the  sea. 
We  were  turning  toward  camp,  when  slowly  the  searchlight 
from  the  sun  lifted  up.  The  mists  caught  fire.  Through 
their  red  and  salmon  embers  broke  the  gigantic  head  and 
shoulders  of  the  Cape. 

Night  gloom  was  down  in  a moment  more;  the  Cape  was 
wrapped  in  cloud.  Nothing  remained  but  a splash  of  copper 
where  the  sun  had  fallen  into  the  sea. 

Again  came  three  drift-swept  days.  We  saw  no  land  save 
near-by  islands  and  occasionally  a black  thread  of  coast. 
More  slowly  we  travelled,  for  the  dogs  were  weak.  There 
were  fruitless  hunts  for  seal.  The  evenings  were  all  the 
same — mending  and  keeping  gear  in  repair,  and  Nanook’s 
tales.  One  night  he  told  us  how  he  and  his  mother  (he  was 
a boy  then)  were  travelling  through  the  interior  with  a band 
of  Eskimos.  Two  of  them  died  of  starvation ; he  himself  was 
badly  frozen.  He  said  dogs  were  good  eating;  he  with  the 


152 


MY  ESKIMO  FRIENDS 


others  ate  them  then.  “Harry  Lauder”  told  me  too  that 
dogs  were  good  eating;  he  told  us  that  one  winter  they  had 
nothing  to  eat  for  a long  time  but  dogs.  For  a month  they 
had  no  light  for  their  igloos. 

The  fourth  day  was  clear.  Again  there  were  sundogs,  and 
the  coast  hung  miraged  in  the  stark  sky.  But  notwithstand- 
ing, Nanook  told  us  he  had  found  a landmark.  It  was  Mos- 
quito Bay,  and  the  Cape  was  near — not  more  than  two  days 
away.  But  even  by  noon  we  found  no  bay  to  cross.  Our 
faces  fell;  Nanook  bowed  his  head  and  steadfastly  refused  to 
look  upon  the  confounding  mirage  again. 

Whenever  we  crossed  cracks  or  fissures  in  the  ice  Nanook 
scanned  them  for  signs  of  seal.  Some  he  followed  far  afield, 
only  to  spend  an  hour’s  hard  running  to  catch  up  with  us 
again.  We  looked  anxiously  for  the  Cape,  but  everywhere 
in  the  north  were  nothing  but  ponderous  banks  of  clouds. 
As  evening  drew  near,  Nanook  said  that  we  were  near  the 
mouth  of  Mosquito  Bay,  and  pointed  to  a speck  of  hill  which 
broke  the  thin  low  line  of  coast.  We  turned  in,  cheerful  over 
the  prospect  of  crossing  it  on  the  morrow.  The  crew  were 
filled  with  jokes  and  chatter  about  bear  and  seal  and  foxes 
that  were  waiting  for  them  on  the  Cape. 

We  were  off  at  daybreak  next  day.  But  the  long  hours 
dragged  one  by  one,  and  still  no  sign  of  the  landmark  we  had 
been  looking  for  so  long.  Nanook,  ashamed  to  join  us  at 
the  sledge,  was  a black  dot  on  the  ice  ahead.  Every  little 
way  we  stopped  to  rest  the  dogs;  the  poor  brutes  were  starv- 
ing; Tooktoo,  our  big  brown  leader,  was  too  weak  to  carry 
on.  We  lashed  him  on  the  sledge.  To  keep  them  from 
freezing,  one  of  us  now  and  then  rubbed  his  feet. 


FILMS 


153 


The  twenty-second  day.  Again  we  carried  the  brown  dog 
on  the  sledge.  His  groans  troubled  the  team,  who  would 
halt  and  turn  their  heads  toward  him.  We  took  turns  at 
putting  our  shoulders  to  the  sledge,  for  the  team  could  barely 
keep  it  moving.  When  we  halted  to  rest  them  and  untangle 
traces  Nanook,  pointing  to  Tooktoo,  said  he  was  dying.  He 
killed  him  with  a bear  spear.  I suggested  we  might  take  the 
carcass  to  use  as  dog  food;  but  Nanook,  holding  it  aloft,  said 
it  was  a skeleton.  So  we  left  poor  old  Tooktoo,  a brown 
patch  lying  on  the  snow. 

Again  we  took  turns  at  putting  our  shoulders  to  the  sledge. 
We  saw  nothing  of  the  coast,  so  thick  was  the  drive  of  snow. 
Slowly  the  day  dragged  on.  Nanook  talked  to,  urged,  and 
cajoled  the  broken  team.  Glumly  enough  we  were  debating 
whether  it  would  not  be  wise  to  stop,  igloo  for  the  night,  and 
rest  up  the  team;  when  Nanook  pointed  with  his  harpoon  to 
a break  in  the  sky  ahead.  High  up  from  where  the  line  of 
coast  should  be  loomed  a patch  of  gray  and  black,  guttered 
by  ravines  of  snow. 

“The  Cape ! ” he  called.  Then  the  sun  flooded  everything, 
and  everywhere  the  shroud  before  us  fell  away;  and  a gigan- 
tic flank,  wrinkled,  seamed  and  scarred,  rose  for  a thousand 
feet  until  it  touched  the  sky. 

Every  dog  knew  we  were  near  the  journey’s  end.  Not  for 
days  had  our  lump  of  sledge  moved  so  fast.  The  night  was 
down,  but  within  the  hour  we  were  on  the  ice  foot  of  the  Cape 
cutting  an  igloo  in  the  snow.  I fell  asleep  to  the  drone  of 
Nanook’s  voice,  running  over  plans  for  the  great  seal  hunt  in 
the  morning. 

When  I wakened,  though  daylight  was  still  an  hour  away. 


154 


MY  ESKIMO  FRIENDS 


Nanook,  by  fitful  candlelight,  was  going  over  his  spears  and 
harpoons.  He  smacked  his  lips  when  he  talked  of  seal. 
Where  we  were  camped  the  rough  sea  ice,  jammed  high 
against  the  shoreline  of  the  Cape,  prevented  our  seeing  the 
sea.  So,  with  our  hearts  in  our  mouths,  we  climbed  a rise 
for  a sight  of  Nanook’s  great  hunting  ground.  For  some  time 
we  strained  our  eyes  out  over  that  white  waste  before  we 
realized  that  nowhere  was  there  an  open  lane  or  dot  of  tidal 
pool,  but  everywhere  it  was  unbroken — solid  ice,  jammed 
in  by  the  wind  and  as  barren  as  the  desert  over  which  we  had 
come. 

From  my  diary: 

Wednesday^  February  8th. — Gale  all  through  the  night. 
Its  roar  resounds  despite  thick  igloo  walls.  Nanook  went 
out  at  daybreak;  returned  in  half  an  hour.  “Too  much 
wind,”  said  he.  Saw  tracks  of  four  bear  which  must  have 
crossed  ice  foot  within  sight  of  igloo  some  time  during  night. 
Our  dogs  either  failed  to  smell  them  or  were  too  weak  to 
sound  alarm.  Indoors  all  day.  Constantly  comes  the  boom 
and  thunder  of  the  icefields  as  they  jam  and  raft  high  along 
the  coast. 

Thursday. — Gale  subsides.  Myself  not  very  fit.  In 
igloo  all  day.  When  among  the  icefields  sealing  Nanook 
kills  one,  but  very  small.  So  hungry  they  couldn’t  wait  to 
carry  it  to  igloo  for  flensing,  but  gorged  on  it  where  it  lay. 
When  Nanook  came  crawling  through  the  igloo  dragging 
what  remained  of  the  carcass  he  had  a battle  royal  with  the 
dogs. 

Through  the  evening  Nanook  talked  of  ice;  of  how  he  and 
his  two  hunting  companions  were  nearly  caught  on  the  ice 


'I 


i 

I 


H I M S E L F— W ETALLTOK 


FILMS 


155 


pack  which  drove  out  to  sea.  “Where  it  happened  is  not  a 
half-day’s  sledging  from  this  igloo.  We  were  out  on  the 
rough  ice  after  bear.  We  had  made  a kill  and  were  on  our 
way  in  to  land,  when  we  came  upon  a lane  of  open  water 
which  stood  between  us  and  the  ice  foot  of  the  Cape.  Far 
off  in  the  distance  the  lane  narrowed.  We  dropped  our  kill 
and  made  off  as  fast  as  we  could  travel,  but  nowhere  was  the 
lane  narrow  enough  to  leap.  Just  in  time  we  spied  an  ice 
pan.  It  was  about  the  length  of  a sledge.  With  the  ice 
pan  for  boat,  our  harpoons  for  paddles,  we  paddled  across.” 

Then  each  of  the  crew  told  of  some  misadventure  he  had 
had  at  some  time  or  other  on  the  ice.  “Harry  Lauder,” 
with  his  father  and  mother,  the  mother  carrying  a babe  in 
arms,  were  adrift  all  through  one  moon  off  the  Gulf  Hazard 
coast.  When  the  west  winds  packed  the  icefield  in  to  the 
mainland  where  they  landed  was  Cape  Dufferin,  two  hun- 
dred and  fifty  miles  north  of  Gulf  Hazard.  The  winter  was 
almost  done  before  they  saw  home  again. 

“I  remember  Comock  of  Kovik,  just  north  of  here,”  said 
Nanook.  “Comock  and  three  men,  wives,  and  children 
were  out  on  the  ice.  The  ice  broke  while  they  slept.  Two 
of  the  men,  a woman,  and  three  children  drifted  off  one  way 
and  Comock  and  the  rest  off  the  other.  The  others  were 
never  seen  or  heard  of  again.  But  Comock  and  his  crowd, 
after  days  and  days  adrift,  touched  land.  It  was  the  big 
island  far  off  from  Kovik  [Mansfield  Island,  seventy  miles 
off  the  coast].  On  this  island  did  Comock  and  his  people 
live.  They  were  very  poor.  They  clothed  themselves  with 
skins  of  the  bear.  Their  sinew  [thread]  they  cut  from  the 
intestines  of  the  salmon.  They  got  very  hungry  for  their 


MY  ESKIMO  FRIENDS 


156 

old  friends  and  homeland,  so  one  day  they  put  out  upon  the 
ice  as  it  was  parting  from  the  shoreline,  hoping  that  the  west 
winds  would  blow  long  enough  to  carry  them  over  to  the 
mainland.  But  for  a moon  they  drifted  here  and  there  and 
everywhere,  and  when  they  landed  it  was  on  an  island  off 
Cape  Wolstenholme. 

“They  were  very  poor,” Nanook repeated.  “They  lived 
on  sea  pigeons  which  they  killed  with  stones.  With  what 
sealskins  they  had  and  what  driftwood,  walrus  bones,  and  a 
deer  horn  they  found  along  the  shore,  they  made  an  omiak. 
But  the  omiak  was  not  large  enough  to  hold  them  all,  who 
now  numbered  thirteen  men,  women,  babes,  and  children. 
So  they  blew  up  seal  bladders  and  tied  them  on  the  sides  of 
their  omiak.  Comock’s  head  wife  held  a long  stick  in  her 
hands  so  that  she  might  keep  the  children  still.  Where  they 
reached  the  mainland  was  on  the  straight  up-and-down  coast 
of  Cape  Wolstenholme.  On  the  first  narrow  ledge  that  they 
could  see  they  landed,  for  a strong  wind  was  rising.  The 
landing  was  barely  big  enough  to  hold  their  omiaks  and 
themselves,  but  here  for  two  days  they  had  to  stay.  The 
seas  drenched  them.  When  the  water  was  calm  again  they 
launched  their  omiak,  paddled  around  the  big  nose  of  the 
Cape,  and  landed  in  the  snug  cove  on  the  other  side.  Old 
friends  greeted  them  when  they  walked  out  on  shore.  They 
must  have  been  glad,”  said  Nanook  in  conclusion. 

“How  long  was  it,”  I asked,  “from  the  time  they  were 
swept  out  to  sea  before  they  reached  their  homeland  again?” 

“Ten  summers  and  ten  winters  were  the  number  of  the 
notches  that  Comock  cut  on  the  handle  of  his  harpoon,” 
Nanook  replied. 


FILMS 


157 


Friday. — Living  gale  from  southward.  Coal-oil  almost 
gone.  Nanook  improvised  a seal-oil  lamp  out  of  a piece  of 
driftwood,  fireproofing  the  wick  side  with  a strip  of  tin. 
Depend  upon  it  for  warmth  but  it  gives  a woful  amount. 
Nothing  to  do  but  keep  in  sleeping-bag  and  huddle  from  the 
cold  and  listen  to  the  bitter  wind  as  it  pipes  above  the  hiss  of 
driving  snow  about  the  igloo  dome.  Shadows  show,  through 
the  snow  walls,  of  great  clouds  of  drift  as  they  go  birling  by. 

Saturday. — Sleepless,  I listened  all  night  for  a let-up  to  the 
wail  of  wind.  Dawn  was  still,  but  crawling  out-of-doors 
everything  was  blanketed  with  rime  and  heavy  snow.  With- 
in the  hour  the  wind  whipped  around  to  the  north  and  was 
blowing  another  gale.  Again  no  sealing.  Our  igloo  was 
much  begrimed.  The  heap  of  picked  bones  in  the  lamp  cor- 
ner was  a sight.  Nanook  with  his  snow  knife  scraped  away 
the  litter;  as  he  brushed  it  out  through  the  door  the  dogs 
turned  the  place  into  pandemonium  with  their  fighting.  We 
had  to  club  hard  to  prevent  them  forcing  an  entrance. 
Later  during  the  day  the  dogs  ate  up  some  of  our  precious 
seal  line  and  a sealskin  bow-and-arrow  case  which  we  had 
cached — out  of  harm’s  way,  we  supposed — on  top  the  igloo 
dome. 

Overnight  the  gale  subsided.  We  broke  camp  and  put 
out  along  the  Cape’s  north  flank.  Within  the  mile  we 
sighted  a white  fox  jumping  wildly  to  get  free  of  a trap 
Nanook  had  set  the  day  before.  The  fox  was  no  sooner 
killed  and  the  sledge  started  again  than  Nanook,  squatted 
on  the  sledgeload,  skinned  the  fox  and  shared  with  the  men 
rare  tidbits  of  the  still-warm  flesh.  Blood  drops  fell  on  the 
trail,  and  on  his  bootlegs  were  great  red  splotches.  When  I 


MY  ESKIMO  FRIENDS 


158 

remarked  that  they  must  be  very  hungry,  said  Nanook,  “We 
have  had  no  food.”  I remonstrated.  Said  he,  only  enough 
remained  for  me,  and  he  added,  “From  now  on  there  will  be 
no  sharing.”  Iglooed  on  the  ice  foot.  Igloo  very  cold. 
My  cold  feet  prevented  sleep,  but  Nanook,  crawling  over, 
took  off  his  kooletah,  placed  them  on  his  stomach,  put  them 
under  the  pits  of  his  arms  and  rubbed  them  until  they  were 
warm  through  and  through. 

Monday. — At  dark  men  returned.  They  saw  the  tracks  of 
eight  bear  through  various  hours  of  the  day,  all  of  them  going 
far  out  to  sea  on  their  hunt  for  seal.  Nanook  returned  late. 
How  we  waited  to  hear  above  the  din  of  dog  howling  some 
word  of  bear  caves!  But  there  were  many  gulps  of  food  and 
sips  of  tea  before  he  gave  us  any  news.  Saw  many,  many 
signs,  but  no  caves.  The  bear  are  far  out  on  the  ice  edge  at 
sea,  he  thinks.  He  fears  snow  is  too  heavily  drifted  by  re- 
cent gales  and  dens  may  be  impossible  to  find.  “Harry 
Lauder,”  for  the  last  two  days  sulking,  now  tries  to  regain 
my  good-will — on  the  alert  to  cut  my  tobacco,  overhaul  my 
boots  and  dogskin  mitts,  and  keep  my  sleeping  bag,  which 
is  as  stiff  as  so  much  tin,  limber  and  clear  of  rime  and  snow. 

Tuesday. — Cheerless  day.  Very  cold  west  wind.  Met 
many  bear  tracks  as  we  travelled.  Nowhere  a sign  of  open 
water.  We  came  upon  a flock  of  ducks  wheeling  over  the 
rough  ice.  The  sight  filled  me  with  elation,  for  I felt  sure 
that  open  water  must  be  near.  But  Nanook  was  grim  and 
silent.  The  ducks  were  starving — nearly  frozen;  they 
showed  it  in  the  feebleness  of  their  flights.  Every  drift  bank 
in  the  chaos  of  seamed  and  ribbed  lava  which  makes  up  the 
Cape’s  tremendous  flank  we  scanned  for  signs  of  bear.  By 


FILMS 


159 


nightfall  we  reached  the  point  where  the  Cape  buries  its  nose 
in  a snarl  of  frozen  sea.  Nowhere  was  there  a sight  of  open 
water. 

Wednesday. — The  men  went  off  early  sealing  in  the  rough 
ice,  and  Nanook  with  one  of  the  dogs  in  leash  went  up  bear- 
cave  hunting  among  the  ranges.  I dare  not  go  far  from  the 
igloo,  for  no  matter  how  securely  I block  the  igloo  door  the 
dogs  start  digging  at  the  igloo  walls  the  moment  my  back  is 
turned.  The  men  returned  at  dark.  No  seals,  but  far  out 
they  saw  a narrow  lane  of  open  water. 

Thursday. — The  dogs  all  in.  Whenever  I crawl  out 
through  the  tunnel  I have  to  lift  them  like  sacks  of  flour  out 
of  my  way.  During  the  morning  I saw  a blue  lane  of  open 
water  out  in  the  west.  Time  and  time  again  I climbed  to  a 
lookout  for  a sight  of  the  men,  fearful  that  they  might  dare 
too  much  or  be  swept  out  to  sea. 

Friday^  Saturday^  Sunday. — Same — no  seals. 

Monday. — Same,  no  seals.  No  light,  no  oil  for  lamp. 
Igloo  very  cold.  Morning  and  night  three  candles  under  an 
old  lard  pail  thawed  out  my  hunks  of  frozen  beans. 

Tuesday. — Nanook  broke  open  the  snow-block  door  his 
face  all  smiles.  No  wonder:  he  shoved  forward  a small  seal. 
But  his  smile  was  more  than  a small  seal  smile.  An  ogjuk 
— big — longer  than  the  spread  of  his  arms— lay  out  in  a safe 
cache  on  the  ice.  Everywhere  the  sea  ice  was  opening,  he 
said.  Signs  of  bear  were  everywhere — yes,  and  not  a har- 
poon’s throw  from  the  igloo  they  picked  out  the  trail  of  a big 
one  that  not  long  before  had  passed  by.  (Probably  I was 
asleep.)  What  a night!  The  dogs’ bellies  full,  Nanook  and 
the  crew  almost  drunk  with  feasting — chunks  and  chunks 


i6o  MY  ESKIMO  FRIENDS 

and  chunks  of  meat.  Grunted  like  walruses  when  they 
turned  in. 

Wednesday. — Never  have  any  of  our  igloos  been  so  warm. 
From  the  hoar-frosted  prostrate  forms  of  the  men  rise 
streams  of  vapour.  So  much  for  the  body  heat  that  comes 
from  raw  seal-meat  eating. 


V 


WITHIN  a week  the  dogs  were  on  their  feet  again, 
and  we  struck  off  with  a groaning  sledgeload  of  red 
seal  meat  back  along  our  old  trail  along  the  ice 
foot  of  the  Cape.  Less  than  half  way  Nanook,  halting 
the  team,  pointed  up  to  where  the  crest  of  the  Cape,  like  the 
wrinkled  foil  of  silver,  stood  out  against  the  sky.  Over 
the  crest,  he  continued,  the  Eskimos  used  to  portage  to  the  ice 
foot  on  the  southern  flank.  We  could  save  a long  journey 
by  climbing  it,  and  what  was  more,  we  would  be  in  the  bear- 
den  country  the  while.  He  hoped  I wouldn’t  mind  the  climb. 
We  would  have  to  get  in  harness  with  the  dogs  and  go  at  it 
in  easy  stages,  just  a little  sledge  load  at  a time — and  he  pan- 
tomimed the  operation  with  his  snow  knife  in  the  snow.  ! 

We  see-sawed  over  the  ice  foot  into  land  and  struck  up 
the  Cape’s  big  slope.  But  sometimes  the  twelve  tigerish 
dogs  and  we  four,  bent  half  way  to  the  ground,  could  only 
move  the  sledge  by  feet  and  inches.  And  there  were  drift 
banks  into  which  the  sledge  jammed  its  nose  and  died.  Leap 
after  leap  of  the  team  and  our  “heave’s”  and  “ho’s”  failed 
to  dislodge  it;  we  had  to  give  back  some  precious  feet,  with 
snow  knives  smooth  out  the  trail,  and  start  again.  The 
leaps  and  lunges  of  the  team  soon  played  them;  each  dog 
would  blame  his  neighbour  for  their  common  plight,  and 
forthwith  fight  to  kill.  Nanook’s  long  whip,  spitting  terror 
amongst  them,  and  the  crew  and  I,  pulling  on  traces,  were 

i6i 


i62 


MY  ESKIMO  FRIENDS 


the  only  means  of  preventing  death  there  and  then.  Finally 
cowed,  they  gasped  at  full  length  on  the  snow  and  we  must 
wait  long  minutes  until  they  got  their  wind  again. 

Whirlpools  of  drift,  spinning  down  the  slope,  plastered 
us.  By  the  time  we  reached  the  crest  the  wind  was  running 
wild.  Nanook  went  off  to  locate  igloo  snow.  I crouched 
behind  the  bulwark  of  the  sledge  and  watched  the  towers  and 
spirals  and  jets  of  drift  bound  from  ledge  to  ledge,  from  slope 
to  slope  down  to  the  ice  foot,  a white  hair-line  nine  hundred 
feet  below;  the  milky  shreds  and  strings  which  were  snow 
smoke,  dragging  over  the  illimitable  fields  of  ice,  over  the 
sapphire  which  was  sea,  and  on  into  the  vague  west  where 
they  were  drowning  the  big  orange  of  sun. 

Never  did  Nanook’s  spiral  of  snow  blocks  build  up  so 
slowly.  Before  the  first  tier  was  up  I crouched  behind  it  and 
Nanook  with  his  snow  knife  cut  off  a hunk  of  snow  and  tried 
to  rub  out  the  white  of  my  frozen  cheeks  and  nose.  By 
the  time  the  last  block  was  set,  black  night  was  down. 
Nanook  and  the  crew  fed  the  dogs,  coiled  the  harnesses,  and 
sealed  up  the  igloo’s  door.  I had  camp  all  made.  The  moss 
wick  of  the  seal-oil  lamp  was  sending  off  heart-warming  little 
tongues  of  flame;  hunks  of  snow  in  the  pot  above  it  were 
melted  and  warming  up  for  scalding  draughts  of  tea.  Fro- 
zen seal  meat  and  my  beans  were  thawing;  the  willow  mats 
were  down,  and  the  sleeping  bags  lay  unrolled  on  the  igloo’s 
floor  of  snow.  When  Nanook  had  thawed  out  his  frozen 
white  nose  and  whiter  cheeks  and  rubbed  them  red  again, 
said  he,  his  arms  sweeping  round  the  sparkling  white  dome 
which  sheltered  us : “ Oh,  surely  no  igloo  of  the  kablunak  is  so 
wonderful!” 


FILMS 


163 


“Amen,”  said  I. 

For  six  days  we  hunted  for  bear  dens  among  the  pot  holes 
along  the  talus  slopes  and  through  the  deep  ravines  of  the 
Cape’s  south  flank.  But  even  Nanook  had  to  give  in,  for 
recent  gales  and  heavy  drifts  made  success  impossible. 
“Had  we  more  time,”  he  pleaded,  “even  two  weeks  more, 
surely  we  would  find  a den.”  But  there  was  still  the  bulk  of 
the  winter’s  filming  to  be  done  down  at  the  base,  and  the 
margin  of  time  to  do  it  in,  even  if  we  returned  in  record 
time,  would  be  very  small. 

At  daybreak  we  struck  out  for  home — the  team  a-gallop,  or 
overrun  by  the  coasting  sledge  dragging  in  their  harnesses 
through  the  snow.  In  two  hours  we  were  across  the  ice  foot 
and  striking  south  across  the  frozen  sea. 

Day  followed  day — yellow  suns  and  cloudless  skies.  The 
snow  in  those  long  slants  of  ethereal  light  was  as  glowing  as 
so  much  satin,  in  folds  upon  the  land  and  a blanket  upon  the 
sea.  Sundogs — smudges  of  brass  and  ochre — hung  for 
hours  in  the  blue  enamel  of  the  sky. 

Within  ten  days  we  reached  the  abandoned  igloos  of  the 
trip  going  north,  and  home,  said  Nanook,  smiling  from  ear 
to  ear,  was  only  three  days  off.  But  overnight  came  an- 
other drifter.  For  five  days  we  crawled.  The  dogs’  seal 
meat  was  finished;  for  Nanook  and  the  crew  there  was  little 
left  but  bones;  my  beans  were  down  to  crumbs;  and  home, 
with  the  going  as  it  was,  was  still  days  away. 

We  were  travelling  along  the  lowest  of  the  coast — so  low 
that  oftentimes  we  hardly  knew  whether  we  were  on  land  or 
sea.  Said  Nanook:  “The  cache  of  oil  we  laid  on  the  up 
trip  is  still  two  days  farther  on,  but  some  time  to-day  we 


MY  ESKIMO  FRIENDS 


164 

should  see  the  stump  of  driftwood  which  I found  the  day  we 
reached  the  abandoned  igloos.  I left  it  up-ended  in  the 
snow — we’ll  get  some  red  heat  to-night  if  we  find  it.”  But 
though  we  hugged  the  coast  that  precious  fuel,  the  only  drift- 
wood we  found  on  all  its  two  hundred  miles,  we  never  saw 
again.  When  night  came,  cross  bars  from  the  sledge  and  four 
two-hundred-foot  rolls  of  film  was  the  makeshift  that  boiled 
our  tea. 

For  the  next  three  days  what  food  sustained  the  team  was 
the  igloo’s  scraps  and  crumbs.  More  rolls  of  film  and  splin- 
ters from  the  sledge  made  up  our  fuel.  When  we  broke 
camp  on  the  fourth  morning  the  sky  was  clear;  the  wind  was 
strong.  The  snow  was  packing  hard.  Said  Nanook:  “If 
we  strip  the  sledge  of  its  load,  of  the  cameras,  of  the  sleeping- 
bags  and  all,  we’ll  see  home  by  nightfall.”  So  we  left  every- 
thing within  the  igloo,  sealed  up  the  snow  block  of  door,  and 
struck  out  for  home.  Nanook  kept  far  out  in  the  lead,  and 
ever  when  the  team  slowed  down  he  pretended  to  be  spear- 
ing, or  lying  down  with  his  arms  and  legs  imitated  the  flip- 
pers of  a basking  seal.  The  team,  weak  though  they  were, 
never  made  such  speed. 

But  when  night  came  on  there  was  no  sign  of  the  river’s 
mouth  or  the  post’s  cabin  lights.  The  darkness  thickened; 
we  stumbled  over  ridges  and  drifts  of  snow.  Nanook  called 
out  from  the  gloom  ahead  to  halt  and  wait  while  he  scouted 
for  a course  to  follow  through  the  hills  ahead.  Turning  the 
sledge  up  on  one  runner  we  crouched  behind  it.  An  hour  or 
more  Nanook  was  gone.  When  he  returned  said  he:  “There 
is  not  light  enough  to  see.  Nothing  to  do  but  igloo  till  day- 
light comes.”  But  Nanook  and  the  crew  had  hardly  un- 


FILMS  165 

sheathed  their  knives  when  the  wavering  bands  of  the  aurora 
began  gathering  in  the  north,  and  light  as  bright  as  moon- 
light lit  up  the  snow.  We  swung  off  through  a valley  among 
the  hills.  Streamers  like  the  fringes  of  titanic  curtains  hung 
over  us,  sometimes  so  low  that  even  Nanook  reached  out 
his  hand  as  if  to  feel  them.  For  I do  not  know  how  many 
minutes,  they  swayed  and  swung,  then  more  gentle  became 
their  undulations — their  glow  was  dying.  We  had  begun  to 
believe  the  festival  was  over,  when,  like  the  lash  of  whips  un- 
coiling, they  broke  out — maelstroms!  wheels!  whirlpools! 
lavender!  cream!  and  apple-green!  The  light  they  shed,  a 
cast  of  green,  drenched  the  humble  hills  and  slopes  of  snow. 
“ Kapay ! ” exclaimed  Nanook.  “ Kapay ! ” echoed  the  crew. 

The  baying  of  a pack  of  wolves  brought  us  to  our  senses. 
The  wolves  were  the  dog  army  of  the  post. 

“What — no  bear!”  said  Stewart,  the  post  trader,  who 
with  his  interpreter  came  stamping  into  my  cabin  to  welcome 
Nanook  and  me  and  get  news  of  the  trip.  “What,”  he  re- 
peated, “six  hundred  miles  of  travellin’,  eight  weeks  away 
an’  no  bear!” 

“Too  bad,  too  bad,”  he  muttered,  “an’  just  to  think  that 
a week  come  Friday  two  huskies  got  a she-bear  an’  two  cubs 
in  a cave.  ’T would  have  made  a fine  aggie,  they  said,  what 
with  the  fightin’  an’  all — throwin’  the  dogs  through  the  air 
an’  chargin’  here  an’  chargin’  there;  an’,”  he  continued, 
rubbing  it  in,  “all  this  less’n  a day  away!” 


VI 


SPRING  in  the  north  is  long  in  coming.  It  was  not 
until  the  last  week  in  May  that  two  lone  honking 
geese  flying  low  over  the  post  brought  the  natives 
running  from  their  tents  exclaiming  “Awyung  [spring]  is 
here!”  By  the  end  of  June  all  the  snow,  save  deep  drifts  in 
ravines  and  along  the  slopes  of  hills,  was  gone.  Arctic 
flowers,  solid  masses  of  purple,  white,  and  yellow,  sprang  up 
through  the  tawn  and  russet  mosses  of  the  plains.  Flock 
upon  flock  of  geese  like  regiments  came  sailing  through  the 
sky,  and  coveys  of  ptarmigan  hovered  near  the  post  and  even 
perched  upon  the  houses.  Arctic  salmon,  burnished  steel 
and  silver,  teemed  in  the  mouths  of  the  streams  that  tumbled 
into  the  sea,  and  among  the  islands  lying  off  the  coast  were 
swarms  of  nesting  sea  pigeons  and  eiders.  Every  kayak  that 
came  paddling  in  was  loaded,  decks  over,  with  scores  of 
geese,  salmon,  eiders,  and  dozens  of  eggs  for  trade.  The  sun 
went  down  about  ten  and  rose  again  about  three;  it  did  not 
go  far  below  the  blue  line  of  northern  hills,  and  the  glow  of  it 
shot  constantly  up  the  sky,  splashing  colour  on  each  cloud 
bank  that  sailed  by.  Everyone  now  slept  when  he  willed; 
the  voices  of  some  rioting  group  of  youngsters  were  always 
in  the  air. 

Nanook  was  restless;  the  wanderlust  again  was  upon  him. 
He  knew,  he  said  one  day  when  we  were  making  the  whale- 
boat ready  for  sea,  where  there  were  many  white  whales. 

i66 


FILMS 


167 

They  played  in  a little  bottle-necked  harbour  some  three 
days’  kayaking  up  the  coast.  We  might,  he  continued  hope- 
fully, get  the  “big  aggie”  there. 

Icefields  still  lay  along  the  coast,  the  blue-green  ribbons  of 
water  lanes  amongst  them  ever  changing  with  the  working 
of  the  winds  and  tide.  Came  a driving  nor’easter  herding 
the  floes  to  sea,  and  before  the  day  was  ended  all  that  re- 
mained was  a thin  white  line  far  out  in  the  west. 

Wild  fowl  in  multitudes  we  encountered  on  the  way. 
Under  the  leaning  brows  of  cliffs  that  rose  three  hundred  feet 
in  air  were  strata  of  sea  gulls  and  clouds  of  sea  pigeons  and 
big  eiders.  A weird  medley  were  their  wild  cries  and  screams 
the  reechoing  of  our  guns  and  the  deep  booming  of  the 
sea. 

Where  we  landed  for  sea-pigeon  eggs  the  sea  pigeons 
swarmed  like  flies  hardly  an  arm’s  length  above  us.  As 
they  came  breast  on,  Nanook  would  hurl  a piece  of  driftwood 
into  them,  bringing  down  three  or  four  birds  with  a single 
throw. 

With  a gale  from  the  west  the  icefields  again  came  in,  and, 
rafting  high  along  the  rock  masses  of  the  coast,  kept  us  pris- 
oners. We  went  inland,  goose-hunting  among  the  tundra’s 
tiny  ponds.  The  geese,  having  shed  their  wing  feathers, 
were  unable  to  fly.  Over  the  spongy  tundra  they  scattered 
here  and  there  and  everywhere.  Only  the  young  men  had 
wind  enough  to  run  them  down. 

For  two  days  we  worked  through  every  winding  lane  that 
opened  with  the  tides,  or  hauled  the  boat  up  on  to  the  floes 
as  the  lanes  closed  in  again,  until  a providential  offshore 
wind  finally  freed  us  and  we  bowled  in  to  a bare  rock  strip  of 


i68 


MY  ESKIMO  FRIENDS 


point  which  proved  to  be  Nanook’s  “Culelulewak  noona” 
(the  white  whale  land). 

VVe  dared  not  camp  too  near  the  bottle-necked  entrance 
to  the  whale  ground,  for  even  from  a mile  away  the  banging 
of  an  oar  against  a gunwale  might  frighten  the  whales  and 
drive  them  out  to  sea.  We  camped  under  the  lee  of  a cliff  a 
mile  and  a half  distant,  and  upon  its  crest  the  men  took  turns 
as  lookout.  It  was  two  weeks  to  a day  when  a school  of 
some  twenty,  all  told,  came  swinging  in  from  sea.  Nanook, 
leading  the  fleet  of  kayakers,  slowly  paddled  toward  the 
harbour’s  mouth.  “Harry  Lauder,”  carrying  the  Akeley 
camera,  and  myself  with  the  hand  camera  and  film  retorts 
walked  overland  to  the  harbour  head.  We  were  hardly 
more  than  half  way  over  when  the  lookout  signalled  that  the 
whales  were  in.  The  kayakers  at  their  fastest  speed  raced 
for  the  entrance,  and  side  by  side  with  paddles  beating  gun- 
wales and  all  the  shouts  and  yells  their  lungs  could  stand 
came  slowly  in.  The  deafening  din  threw  the  quarry  into  a 
panic.  The  whales’  ear  drums,  Nanook  had  explained,  are 
so  sensitive  that  sound  not  only  frightens  but  hurts  them. 
Their  snow-white  bodies  flashed  in  the  sun  as  they  came  up 
to  blow  or  to  rush  around  the  small  loop  of  the  harbour’s  end, 
only  to  meet  the  barriers  of  land.  Time  after  time  they 
tried  to  break  through  the  kayak’s  cordon,  only  to  be  driven 
back  again  or  harpooned  if  they  came  too  near.  For  an 
hour  the  fight  kept  on,  until  five  were  harpooned.  With 
their  kayaks  hitched  in  line,  Nanook  and  his  companions 
spent  the  remainder  of  the  day  towing  in  the  kill  and  hauling 
them  out  on  shore.  Two  days  were  consumed  in  cutting  up 
and  apportioning  it.  With  the  whaleboat  full  of  meat  which 


FILMS 


169 

Nanook  was  taking  as  presents  to  his  people  at  the  post,  we 
left  for  the  south,  all  the  stock  of  film  I carried  exposed  on 
Nanook’s  last  “big  aggie.” 

When  August  came  Stewart,  the  trader,  and  I began 
speculating  as  to  when  the  once-a-year  little  schooner,  with 
its  precious  mail  from  home  and  news  of  the  busy  world, 
would  come.  We  thumbed  through  the  post  diaries  for 
dates  of  past  arrivals  and,  averaging  them  up,  made  bets. 
A lookout  was  almost  constantly  on  the  hills,  for  a sack  of 
sea  biscuit  was  the  prize  for  him  who  first  should  see  her  sails. 

To  poor  old  Nanook  the  world  seemed  empty.  He  hung 
about  my  cabin,  talking  over  films  we  still  could  make  if  I 
would  only  stay  on  for  another  year.  He  never  quite  under- 
stood why  I should  have  gone  to  all  the  fuss  and  pother  of 
making  the  “big  aggie”  of  him — the  hunting,  yes — but 
surely  everyone  knew  the  Eskimo,  and  could  anything  possi- 
bly be  more  common  than  dogs  and  sledges  and  snow  houses? 
I tried  to  give  him  an  idea  of  the  big  igloos  the  kablunak  had 
for  showing  films.  To  him,  the  hundred  and  fifty  of  his 
fellow  men,  as  many  more  at  Great  Whale,  in  the  distant 
south,  and  at  far-off  Fort  Chimo,  and  at  Cape  Wolstenholme, 
were  practically  the  population  of  the  world.  The  kablu- 
nak’s  movie  igloo,  into  which  thousands  came,  was  utterly 
beyond  his  comprehension.  They  were  many,  I used  to  say, 
like  the  little  stones  along  the  shore.  “And  will  all  these 
kablunaks  see  our  ‘big  aggie’?”  he  would  ask.  There  was 
never  need  to  answer,  for  incredulity  was  written  large  upon 
his  face. 

At  last  came  the  signal  from  the  lookout  on  the  hill. 


MY  ESKIMO  FRIENDS 


170 

Within  two  days  I was  aboard  and  the  Annie's  nose  was 
headed  south.  Nanook  followed  in  his  kayak,  until  the 
Annie^  gathering  speed,  gradually  drew  away.  I saw  him 
turn,  still  waving,  toward  his  topek,  which  stood  out  from 
the  low,  melancholy  waste  of  shore — all  that  he  called  home! 

Less  than  two  years  later,  I received  word  by  the  once-a- 
year  mail  that  comes  out  of  the  north  that  Nanook  was  dead. 
Poor  old  Nanook!  Our  “big  aggie,”  become  “Nanook  of 
the  North,”  has  gone  into  most  of  the  odd  corners  of  the 
world — into  the  desert  of  the  Sahara,  India,  Burma,  Siam, 
where  audiences  must  be  told  that  white  means  snow;  and 
more  kablunaks  than  there  are  stones  around  the  shore  of 
Nanook’s  home  have  looked  upon  Nanook,  the  kindly,  the 
brave,  the  simple  Eskimo. 


THE  END 


SOCVAY  PUBOC  LIBRARY 


m 


f: 

i; 


I 


Ja'-: 


Solvay  Public  Library 
SOLVAY,  N.  Y. 

CLASS  BOOK 

917.12  F59  r, 


Scanned  from  the  collection  of 
David  Pierce 


Coordinated  by  the 
Media  History  Digital  Library 
www.mediahistoiyproject.org 


This  book  is  provided  for  purposes  of 
scholarship  or  research  under  the  provisions  of 

Section  io8h 

of  the  Copyright  Law  of  the  United  States. 

If  you  believe  this  work  has  been  scanned 
in  error,  please  contact  us  at 
http://archive.org/about/terms.php